Acts

Acts front

Introduction to Acts

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.

What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

Figurative usages in the book of Acts

“arise/arising”

Luke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.

“brothers”

Luke often uses the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

“to the same”

The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

“in/to/into the temple”

Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are: - Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’” - Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” - Acts 24:6–8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” - Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are: - Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.” - Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.” - Acts 10:19, “three men.” Some versions read “two men” or “some men.” - Acts 10:30, “Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” - Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”). - Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.” - Acts 15:17–18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: Textual Variants)

Acts 1

Acts 1 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: heaven, sky, heavens, heavenly and resurrection)

Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in 1:5. In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in 2:4. (See: baptize, baptized, baptism)

“He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in 1:3, he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of 1:1 to the end of 1:3. ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in 1:18 that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you could let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in 1:13 instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

Acts 1:1

I made the first account

Quote: τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by the first account he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume”

O Theophilus

Quote: ὦ Θεόφιλε (1)

Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.

Theophilus

Quote: Θεόφιλε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Theophilus is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name.

about all that Jesus began both to do and to teach

Quote: περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Luke is using the word began to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught”

about all that Jesus began both to do and to teach

Quote: περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught”

Acts 1:2

until that day

Quote: ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word day to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when”

he was taken up

Quote: ἀνελήμφθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up”

he was taken up

Quote: ἀνελήμφθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke is referring to Jesus being taken up into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven”

Acts 1:3

to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs

Quote: οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις (1)

As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”

after he had suffered

Quote: μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross”

with many proofs

Quote: ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word translated proofs describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs”

appearing to them for 40 days and speaking

Quote: δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

While the antecedent of whom is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke”

things concerning the kingdom of God

Quote: τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does.

Acts 1:4

not to depart from Jerusalem, but

Quote: ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb depart. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and”

not to depart from Jerusalem

Quote: ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does.

the promise of the Father

Quote: τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a promise to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised”

of the Father

Quote: τοῦ Πατρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father”

which you heard from me

Quote: ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’”

you heard

Quote: ἠκούσατέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

Here, you is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In 1:6, “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether you is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear.

Acts 1:5

John

Quote: Ἰωάννης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer”

you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit

Quote: ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you”

you will be baptized

Quote: ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize”

after these not many days

Quote: οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now”

Acts 1:6

They therefore having assembled, they were asking him

Quote: οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In the first instance, they describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, they refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in 1:8 apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him”

if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time

Quote: εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel”

if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel

Quote: εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel”

Acts 1:7

It is not for you to know

Quote: οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know”

the times or the seasons

Quote: χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words times and seasons could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time”

the Father

Quote: ὁ Πατὴρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father”

by his own authority

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word authority, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things”

Acts 1:8

you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses

Quote: λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Jesus is using the word translated and to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses”

power

Quote: δύναμιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word power, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability”

to the end of the earth

Quote: ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here”

Acts 1:9

as they were looking

Quote: βλεπόντων αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Your language may require you to specify the object of looking. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him”

he was raised up

Quote: ἐπήρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up”

from their eyes

Quote: ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the eyes of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight”

Acts 1:10

they were looking intently into heaven

Quote: ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated heaven here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky”

and behold, two men

Quote: καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these two men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men”

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Luke uses the word translated And to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then”

two men

Quote: ἄνδρες δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

These were actually angels. Luke calls them men because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels”

white clothes

Quote: ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς (1)

In this context, the word white likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”

Acts 1:11

they said

Quote: οἳ & εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation.

they said

Quote: οἳ & εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs

If you retain the word they in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking.

Men, Galileans

Quote: ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans”

why do you stand looking into heaven

Quote: τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!”

why do you stand looking

Quote: τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression stand means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking”

the one having been taken up from you into heaven, … you saw him going into heaven

Quote: ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated heaven likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky”

the one having been taken up

Quote: ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up”

the way

Quote: ὃν τρόπον (1)

Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”

Acts 1:12

they returned

Quote: ὑπέστρεψαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The word they refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned”

the hill that is called Olivet

Quote: ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet”

the hill that is called Olivet

Quote: ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Olivet is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does.

having a journey of a Sabbath

Quote: Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression having a journey refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away”

having a journey of a Sabbath

Quote: Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The journey of a Sabbath was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away”

Acts 1:13

when they arrived

Quote: ὅτε εἰσῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem”

they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying

Quote: εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression upper chamber describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house”

James of Alphaeus … Judas of James

Quote: Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James”

James of Alphaeus … Judas of James

Quote: Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are the names of four men. As the UST indicates, the man named James who was the father of Judas is not the same man as the James who is mentioned first in this verse, and he is also not the same man as James the son of Alphaeus.

Simon the Zealot

Quote: Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Simon is the name of a man, and Zealot is another name by which he was known. (1) Zealot could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) Zealot could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One”

Acts 1:14

unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν (1)

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”

the women

Quote: γυναιξὶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in Luke 8:2–3 and 23:49. Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry”

his brothers

Quote: τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here.

Acts 1:15

And in those days

Quote: καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

in those days

Quote: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time”

having stood up

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say”

of the brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers”

of the brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense.

and the multitude of names to the same was about 120

Quote: ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.”

the multitude of names

Quote: ὄχλος ὀνομάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term names to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people”

to the same

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ (1)

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”

Acts 1:16

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers”

it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, the one having become a guide to the ones arresting Jesus

Quote: ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this scripture before his statement that it had to be fulfilled. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled”

it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled

Quote: ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place”

spoke before

Quote: προεῖπε (1)

Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”

by the mouth of David

Quote: διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the word mouth to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in 1:20. Alternate translation: “through the words of David”

the one having become a guide to the ones arresting Jesus

Quote: τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Peter is using the act of guiding the ones arresting Jesus to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies”

Acts 1:17

For

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter uses the word For to introduce the reason for a result that is described in 1:21–22, after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in 1:16. The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since”

he was numbered with us and received a share of this ministry

Quote: κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us”

he was numbered with us

Quote: κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν (1)

Peter is using the term numbered in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”

he was numbered with us

Quote: κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles”

with us

Quote: ἐν ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word us to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that us is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles”

a share of this ministry

Quote: τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in 1:18–19. The quotation resumes in 1:20. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase.

Acts 1:18

Now indeed

Quote: μὲν οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language.

this one

Quote: οὗτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state “he” or use the name “Judas.”

from the wage of unrighteousness

Quote: ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word unrighteousness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed”

from the wage of unrighteousness

Quote: ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term unrighteousness to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus”

having fallen headfirst

Quote: πρηνὴς γενόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field”

having fallen headfirst

Quote: πρηνὴς γενόμενος (1)

The word headfirst describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”

all his entrails were poured out

Quote: ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out”

Acts 1:19

it became known to all those living in Jerusalem

Quote: γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)

The verb form is not passive here, since known is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make it the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”

it became known to all those living in Jerusalem

Quote: γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem”

Therefore that field was called

Quote: ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field”

Akeldama

Quote: Ἁκελδαμάχ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

Akeldama is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, Field of Blood. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning.

Acts 1:20

For it is written

Quote: γέγραπται γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’”

it is written in the book of Psalms, Let his habitation become desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and Let another take his overseership

Quote: γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership”

it is written in the book of Psalms

Quote: γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms”

Let his habitation become desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it

Quote: γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it”

Let his habitation become desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it

Quote: γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it”

Let his habitation become desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it

Quote: γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it”

Let his habitation become desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it

Quote: γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate”

Let his habitation become desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it

Quote: γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The word habitation likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line”

Let another take his overseership

Quote: τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος (1)

The word overseership refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in 1 Timothy 3:1. Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”

Let another take his overseership

Quote: τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership”

Let another take his overseership

Quote: τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership”

Let another take his overseership

Quote: τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another”

Acts 1:21

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.”

us … us

Quote: ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

In the first instance of us, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of us, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance.

the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us

Quote: εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us”

Acts 1:22

beginning from the baptism of John

Quote: ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word baptism, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people”

the day on which

Quote: τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific day, Peter may be using the word day to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when”

he was taken up … of his resurrection

Quote: ἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun his also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus”

he was taken up from us

Quote: ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us”

from us—… with us

Quote: ἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

When Peter says from us, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says with us, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction.

one of these

Quote: ἕνα τούτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is”

of his resurrection

Quote: τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died”

Acts 1:23

they stood up two

Quote: ἔστησαν δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two”

they stood up two

Quote: ἔστησαν δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described”

they stood up two

Quote: ἔστησαν δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When the believers stood up these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described”

Joseph, … Barsabbas, … Justus

Quote: Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Joseph is the name of a man, and Barsabbas and Justus are two other names by which he was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. Justus is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.)

called Barsabbas, who was named Justus

Quote: τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus”

Matthias

Quote: Μαθθίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Matthias is the name of a man.

Acts 1:24

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that.

praying, they said

Quote: προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words praying and said indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed”

praying, they said

Quote: προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The pronoun they refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said”

You, Lord, heart-knower of all

Quote: σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων (1)

Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”

You, Lord, heart-knower of all

Quote: σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people”

You, Lord

Quote: σὺ Κύριε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal

The word you is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here.

which one from these two you have chosen

Quote: ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The person who is praying is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men”

Acts 1:25

to take this place of ministry and apostleship

Quote: λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word apostleship identifies what kind of ministry this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry”

from which Judas turned aside

Quote: ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The expression turned aside means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling”

to go to his own place

Quote: πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result”

Acts 1:26

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So”

they cast lots for them

Quote: ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the believers and the pronoun them refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun them and if your language marks the dual form, them would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias”

they cast lots for them

Quote: ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term lots describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias”

the lot fell to Matthias

Quote: ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word fell means “selected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias”

he was chosen together

Quote: συνκατεψηφίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him”

Acts 2

Acts 2 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Pentecost

The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.

Tongues

Luke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.”

Last days

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: last day, last days, latter days)

The prophecy of Joel

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: prophet, prophecy, prophesy, seer, prophetess)

Baptize

In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1–11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: baptize, baptized, baptism)

Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“You killed” (2:23)

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.

Long sentences

There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

Poetry

The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: Poetry.

Acts 2:1

And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled

Quote: καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

when the day of Pentecost was completely filled

Quote: ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost”

when the day of Pentecost was completely filled

Quote: ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here.

they were all together

Quote: ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the word they refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together”

to the same

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό (1)

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”

Acts 2:2

from heaven

Quote: ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)

The word translated heaven could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from heaven itself.

as of a strong wind being borne along

Quote: ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along”

a strong wind being borne along

Quote: φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke speaks of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind”

it filled the whole house

Quote: ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke speaks of this sound as if it filled the house. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house”

the whole house

Quote: ὅλον τὸν οἶκον (1)

Luke may be using the word translated house in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”

where they were sitting

Quote: οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke may be using the term sitting to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting”

Acts 2:3

tongues as if of fire

Quote: γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός (1)

This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in Isaiah 5:24, for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”

distributing themselves

Quote: διαμεριζόμεναι (1)

This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”

they sat upon each one of them

Quote: ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the objects, and the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples”

they sat upon each one of them

Quote: ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the word sat to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples”

Acts 2:4

they were all filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all”

they were all filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all”

they began to speak in other languages

Quote: ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Luke is using the word began to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages”

they began to speak in other languages

Quote: ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication, as 2:6–11 makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know”

as the Spirit was giving them to speak out

Quote: καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς (1)

Here, giving has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”

as the Spirit was giving them to speak out

Quote: καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς (1)

The word translated to speak out means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”

Acts 2:5

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language.

godly men

Quote: ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Luke is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people”

every nation

Quote: παντὸς ἔθνους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word every is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations”

under heaven

Quote: ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression under heaven is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth”

Acts 2:6

was confused

Quote: συνεχύθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them”

each one was hearing them speaking in his own language

Quote: ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the believers and the pronoun his refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language”

Acts 2:7

they were … amazed and were marveling

Quote: ἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms amazed and marveling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed”

they were all amazed and were marveling

Quote: ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The expression were … amazed is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling”

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Behold is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact”

are not all these who are speaking Galileans

Quote: οὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!”

Acts 2:8

And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born

Quote: καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!”

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

The speakers are using the word translated And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So”

how are we hearing, each

Quote: πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Your language may require you to specify the object of hearing. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak”

we … our

Quote: ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The speakers are using the words we and our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction.

in which we were born

Quote: ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The speakers say that they were born in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth”

in which we were born

Quote: ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth”

Acts 2:9

Parthians … Medes … Elamites

Quote: Πάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are names of three people groups.

Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia

Quote: τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are names of five areas.

Acts 2:10

Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … of Libya

Quote: Φρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are names of four areas.

Acts 2:11

both Jews and proselytes

Quote: Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι (1)

The term proselytes describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase both Jews and proselytes could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in 2:9–11. Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”

Cretans … Arabians

Quote: Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are names of two people groups.

the great things of God

Quote: τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The speakers are using the adjective great as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done”

Acts 2:12

they were all amazed and were perplexed

Quote: ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words amazed and perplexed mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed”

they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying

Quote: ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said”

What does this want to be

Quote: τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression want to be is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What does this mean?” or “What is the explanation for this”

Acts 2:13

They are filled with sweet wine

Quote: γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine”

They are filled with sweet wine

Quote: γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling”

with sweet wine

Quote: γλεύκους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor”

Acts 2:14

But Peter, having stood with the eleven, raised up his voice

Quote: σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Peter stood to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice”

the eleven

Quote: τοῖς ἕνδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective eleven as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles”

raised up his voice and spoke out to them

Quote: ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The idiom raised up his voice means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice”

Men, Jews

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews”

Men, Jews

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people.

all the ones inhabiting Jerusalem

Quote: οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem”

let this be known to you

Quote: τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω (1)

This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”

let this be known to you

Quote: τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you”

let this be known to you

Quote: τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective known expresses the result of action by a different agent (you), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this”

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter uses the word translated and to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so”

take my words into your ears

Quote: ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the term words to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term ears to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say”

Acts 2:15

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter says for in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because”

these

Quote: οὗτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun these refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages”

for

Quote: γὰρ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter says for in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because”

it is the third hour of the day

Quote: ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας (1)

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”

it is the third hour of the day

Quote: ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early”

the third hour of the day

Quote: ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day”

Acts 2:16

this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel

Quote: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel”

this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel

Quote: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel”

Acts 2:17

And it will be in the last days,” God says, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh

Quote: καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

The material in 2:17–21 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase God says to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’”

And it will be in the last days,” God says, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh

Quote: καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh”

And it will be

Quote: καὶ ἔσται (1)

Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”

the last days

Quote: ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις (1)

See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.

I will pour out from my Spirit

Quote: ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God says that he will pour out his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit”

on all flesh

Quote: ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

God refers to flesh to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people”

and your sons and your daughters will prophesy and your young men will see visions and your old men will dream dreams

Quote: καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams”

your … your … your … your

Quote: ὑμῶν (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of your as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners.

young men … old men

Quote: οἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

God speaks separately of sons and daughters in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between young and old. So the word men could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people”

Acts 2:18

And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy

Quote: καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy”

on my male servants and on my female servants

Quote: ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου (1)

If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”

in those days

Quote: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, days means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time”

on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit

Quote: ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated this in 2:17. Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly”

Acts 2:19

And I will give

Quote: καὶ δώσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give”

I will give wonders … and signs

Quote: δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα (1)

Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”

in the heaven above

Quote: ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω (1)

Since God specifies in the next verse that these wonders will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated heaven likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”

vapor of smoke

Quote: ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here the possessive form describes vapor that looks smoky or that has smoke in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor”

Acts 2:20

The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes

Quote: ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came”

The sun will be turned to darkness

Quote: ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness”

The sun will be turned to darkness

Quote: ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God is speaking as if he would change the sun into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly”

The sun will be turned to darkness

Quote: ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word darkness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark”

and the moon to blood

Quote: καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood”

and the moon to blood

Quote: καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood”

and the moon to blood

Quote: καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God is speaking as if he would change the moon into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red”

great and remarkable day

Quote: ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words great and remarkable mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day”

day of the Lord comes

Quote: ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins”

day of the Lord comes

Quote: ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins”

Acts 2:21

And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved

Quote: καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved”

And it will be, everyone

Quote: καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς (1)

Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”

everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved

Quote: πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name”

everyone who may call on

Quote: πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression call on means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to”

the name of the Lord

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name”

the name of the Lord

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord”

the name of the Lord

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation”

will be saved

Quote: σωθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation.

Acts 2:22

Men, Israelites

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites”

hear these words

Quote: ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the term words to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say”

attested … by God

Quote: ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent”

with mighty works and wonders and signs

Quote: δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms mighty works, wonders, and signs mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles”

Acts 2:23

This one

Quote: τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus”

given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God

Quote: τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The term translated given up is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge”

by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God

Quote: τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words counsel and foreknowledge, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time”

by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God

Quote: τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The word determined is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time”

you killed

Quote: ἀνείλατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed”

by the hand of the lawless

Quote: διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hand refers to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did”

of the lawless

Quote: ἀνόμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective lawless as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people”

of the lawless

Quote: ἀνόμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

By lawless, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles”

having fastened

Quote: προσπήξαντες (1)

This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”

Acts 2:24

whom God raised up

Quote: ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν (1)

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”

whom God raised up

Quote: ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life”

having loosed the agonies of death

Quote: λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter speaks of the agonies of death as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death”

the agonies of death

Quote: τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Peter uses the possessive form to describe death as something that is characterized by agonies. Alternate translation: “agonizing death”

because it was not possible for him to be held by it

Quote: καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why this was not possible. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it”

for him to be held by it

Quote: κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him”

for him to be held by it

Quote: κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead”

Acts 2:25

For David says about him, I saw the Lord before me through all, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved

Quote: Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from Psalm 16:8–11.) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved”

For David says about him, I saw the Lord before me through all, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved

Quote: Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns I and my are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved”

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter uses the word For to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because”

David says about him

Quote: Δαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what David says in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say”

before me

Quote: ἐνώπιόν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The phrase before me, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me”

through all

Quote: διὰ παντός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always”

at my right

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν μού (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Here the adjective right is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side”

at my right

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν μού (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me”

I should not be moved

Quote: μὴ σαλευθῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, moved means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed”

I should not be moved

Quote: μὴ σαλευθῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me”

Acts 2:26

Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope

Quote: διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope”

my heart was glad

Quote: ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad”

my tongue exulted

Quote: ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the tongue represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things”

my flesh will also dwell in hope

Quote: καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, flesh means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope”

my flesh will also dwell in hope

Quote: καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word hope, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully”

my flesh will also dwell in hope

Quote: καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

The Messiah is speaking as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body”

my flesh will also dwell in hope

Quote: καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what hope the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die”

Acts 2:27

For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay

Quote: ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay”

you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay

Quote: οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than nor in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay”

you will not abandon … nor will you allow your

Quote: οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal

The words you and your are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in 1:24 in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.”

you will not abandon my soul to Hades

Quote: οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The Messiah says my soul to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades”

your Holy One

Quote: τὸν Ὅσιόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah”

your Holy One

Quote: τὸν Ὅσιόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah”

to see decay

Quote: ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the word see is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay”

to see decay

Quote: ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body”

Acts 2:28

You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face

Quote: ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face”

You made known … you will fill … your

Quote: ἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal

The words you and your are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in 1:24.

You made known to me the paths of life

Quote: ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Messiah speaks of life as if it consisted of paths that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word known refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again”

you will fill me with gladness

Quote: πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could fill with gladness. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness”

with your face

Quote: μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the word face represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence”

with your face

Quote: μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses.

Acts 2:29

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters”

the patriarch David

Quote: τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

A patriarch is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom”

was buried

Quote: ἐτάφη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him”

to this day

Quote: ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Peter is using the word day to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time”

Acts 2:30

Therefore

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter uses the word Therefore to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that”

being a prophet and having known

Quote: προφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew”

to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne

Quote: ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the word loins to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word fruit in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne”

to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne

Quote: ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

When Peter says that God promised to set one of David’s descendants upon his throne, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king”

Acts 2:31

he spoke … was he abandoned … his

Quote: ἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of he refers to David, and the second instance of he and the pronoun his refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s”

he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ

Quote: ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died”

neither was he abandoned to Hades

Quote: οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades”

of the Christ

Quote: τοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Christ is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does.

nor did his flesh see decay

Quote: οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the word see is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay”

nor did his flesh see decay

Quote: οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the word flesh to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay”

nor did his flesh see decay

Quote: οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition”

Acts 2:32

God has raised up

Quote: ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life”

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 2:33

Therefore

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word Therefore.

Therefore, having been exalted to the right of God

Quote: τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right”

to the right of God

Quote: τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to the right side of God”

to the right of God

Quote: τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God”

and … the promise of the Holy Spirit

Quote: τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send”

the Father

Quote: τοῦ Πατρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father”

he has poured out

Quote: ἐξέχεεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out”

he has poured out

Quote: ἐξέχεεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter says that Jesus has poured out the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in 2:17, to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given”

Acts 2:34

he himself says, The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right

Quote: λέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

The material in 2:34–35 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David (Psalm 110:1), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right”

The Lord said to my Lord

Quote: εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Lord means God here, and my Lord means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah”

at my right

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Here the adjective right is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “at my right side”

at my right

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me”

Acts 2:35

until I make your enemies a stool for your feet

Quote: ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s enemies a stool for his feet to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you”

for your feet

Quote: τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language.

Acts 2:36

Therefore

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah”

let all the house of Israel know

Quote: γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know”

let all the house of Israel know

Quote: γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know”

all the house of Israel

Quote: πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel”

Acts 2:37

hearing this they were pierced in the heart

Quote: ἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart”

they were pierced in the heart

Quote: κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the word they refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart”

they were pierced in the heart

Quote: κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of heart. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”

they were pierced in the heart

Quote: κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking. The people were not literally pierced in the heart by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers”

what should we do

Quote: τί ποιήσωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 2:38

Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins, … you will receive

Quote: μετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

The words you and your are plural, you will receive is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative Repent is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative be baptized is singular, since the subject is each.

be baptized

Quote: βαπτισθήτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you”

in the name of Jesus Christ

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express your allegiance to Jesus Christ as your Lord”

for the forgiveness of your sins

Quote: εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins”

Acts 2:39

the promise is

Quote: ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in 2:33. Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit”

to you and to your children

Quote: ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter showed the people in 2:17 that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility.

to you and to your children

Quote: ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter could also be using the word children in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you”

to all those {being} at a distance

Quote: πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in 11:18. So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire”

the Lord our God

Quote: Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By the Lord our God, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

may call

Quote: ἂν προσκαλέσηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Peter is using the word call in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation”

Acts 2:40

with many other words

Quote: ἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term words to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things”

he testified and urged them

Quote: διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word urged tells in what way Peter testified further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them”

Be saved

Quote: σώθητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you”

from this perverse generation

Quote: ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that God is going to punish this perverse generation. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent”

this perverse generation

Quote: τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word perverse describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this generation rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus”

Acts 2:41

Therefore

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word Therefore to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story.

having received his word

Quote: ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, received means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word”

his word

Quote: τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said”

they were baptized

Quote: οἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them”

souls

Quote: ψυχαὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of these people, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people”

were added

Quote: προσετέθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church”

Acts 2:42

they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers

Quote: ἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words teaching and fellowship, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together”

in the breaking of bread

Quote: τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke could be using the word breaking to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility.

in the breaking of bread

Quote: τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the breaking of bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper”

Acts 2:43

fear was coming on every soul

Quote: ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this fear as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God”

fear was coming on every soul

Quote: ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God”

fear was coming on every soul

Quote: ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says every as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God”

many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles

Quote: πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since Luke says that these things happened through the apostles, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and wonders and signs the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles”

many wonders and signs

Quote: πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles”

Acts 2:44

to the same

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ (1)

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”

had all things in common

Quote: εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke may be saying all as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another”

Acts 2:45

they were selling properties and possessions

Quote: τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words properties and possessions mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned”

and they were distributing them

Quote: καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the pronoun they refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun them refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received”

to all, as anyone might have need

Quote: πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν (1)

Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”

Acts 2:46

and, continuing unanimously every day

Quote: καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν (1)

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”

in the temple

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard”

breaking bread in each house

Quote: κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

See how you translated the similar expression in 2:42. There were two possible meanings there, but here breaking bread seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes”

with exultation and sincerity of heart

Quote: ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity”

with exultation and sincerity of heart

Quote: ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words exultation and sincerity, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely”

Acts 2:47

praising God and having favor with the whole people

Quote: αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says the whole people as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people”

the ones being saved

Quote: τοὺς σῳζομένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving”

to the same

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό (1)

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”

Acts 3

Acts 3 General Notes

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“Servant”

Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in Chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.

“You killed” (3:15)

For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: repent, repentance)

Acts 3:1

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language.

to the temple

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard”

the ninth hour

Quote: τὴν ἐνάτην (1)

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”

the ninth hour

Quote: τὴν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine”

Acts 3:2

And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple

Quote: καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form was being carried. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate”

And a certain man

Quote: καί τις ἀνὴρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

from the womb of his mother

Quote: ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the womb of his mother when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born”

that is called

Quote: τὴν λεγομένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is”

Beautiful

Quote: Ὡραίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Beautiful is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple.

into the temple

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἱερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard”

Acts 3:3

asked to receive alms

Quote: ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him alms (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms”

Acts 3:4

Peter, looking intently at him with John, said

Quote: ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν (1)

This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”

Look at us

Quote: βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of us in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 3:6

Silver and gold

Quote: ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is referring to money by association with the way that silver and gold were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money”

but what I have, this I give to you

Quote: ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

What happens next in the story shows that by what I have, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf”

In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you”

walk

Quote: περιπάτει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk”

Acts 3:7

seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong

Quote: πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In this verse, the pronoun he refers to Peter, while the pronouns him and his refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong”

his feet and ankles were made strong

Quote: ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong”

Acts 3:8

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So”

he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them

Quote: ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun them refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John”

he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them

Quote: ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Luke is using the word began to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked”

into the temple

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard”

Acts 3:9

all the people

Quote: πᾶς ὁ λαὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard”

Acts 3:10

they recognized him, that he was the one sitting

Quote: ἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος (1)

Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”

the Beautiful Gate

Quote: τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:2.

they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement”

they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words wonder and amazement mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement”

they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed”

they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wonder and amazement, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him”

Acts 3:11

all the people

Quote: πᾶς ὁ λαὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there”

the porch that is called Solomon’s

Quote: τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch”

that is called

Quote: τῇ καλουμένῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is”

Acts 3:12

Men, Israelites

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites”

why do you marvel at this

Quote: τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!”

Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness

Quote: ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!”

at us, … our own

Quote: ἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us and our own, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of us and our in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

by our own power or godliness

Quote: ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with or. The term godliness describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the power that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power”

Acts 3:13

of Abraham, … of Isaac, … of Jacob

Quote: Ἀβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are the names of three men.

of our fathers

Quote: τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors”

of our fathers

Quote: τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

The term fathers could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could state “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs”

his Servant Jesus

Quote: τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν (1)

See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”

delivered up

Quote: παρεδώκατε (1)

Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”

before the face of Pilate

Quote: κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the phrase before the face of means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate”

when that one had decided to release him

Quote: κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds one to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him”

Acts 3:14

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,”

the Holy and Righteous One

Quote: τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using both the adjective Holy and the adjective Righteous to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds One to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous”

the Holy and Righteous One

Quote: τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms Holy and Righteous mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy”

the Holy and Righteous One

Quote: τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah”

asked for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you

Quote: ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer”

Acts 3:15

you killed

Quote: ἀπεκτείνατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of”

the Originator of Life

Quote: τὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is using the expression the Originator of Life as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died”

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose”

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun we here, since it would apply to two people.

Acts 3:16

by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong

Quote: ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong”

in his name, … his name

Quote: τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun his refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name”

in his name, … his name

Quote: τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the name of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus”

the faith that {is} through him has given to him

Quote: ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun him refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man”

the faith that {is} through him has given to him this complete health

Quote: ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Peter is speaking of faith as if it were a living thing that could have given complete health to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health”

Acts 3:17

And now

Quote: καὶ νῦν (1)

Peter uses the expression And now to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter addresses the people as his brothers because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen”

you acted in ignorance

Quote: κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter likely means that the people acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah”

as also your rulers

Quote: ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance”

Acts 3:18

But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus

Quote: ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God fulfilled prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer”

through the mouth of all the prophets

Quote: διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, the prophets, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of mouth. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”

through the mouth of all the prophets

Quote: διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said”

of all the prophets

Quote: πάντων τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Peter is using the word all as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets”

Acts 3:19

turn back

Quote: ἐπιστρέψατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again”

for your sins to be wiped away

Quote: πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins”

for your sins to be wiped away

Quote: πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically wiped away when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins”

Acts 3:20

so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord

Quote: ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Peter is speaking of these times as if they could actively come to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face”

times of refreshment

Quote: καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word refreshment, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times”

from the face of the Lord

Quote: ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term face to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord”

he may send

Quote: ἀποστείλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send”

the one appointed for you

Quote: τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you”

Acts 3:21

whom it is necessary for heaven to receive

Quote: ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Peter is speaking of heaven as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven”

until the times of the restoration of all things

Quote: ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word restoration, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things”

from the age

Quote: ἀπ’ αἰῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression from the age means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago”

through the mouth of his holy prophets

Quote: διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said”

Acts 3:22

Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you

Quote: Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us”

The Lord our God

Quote: Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT.

The Lord our God

Quote: Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

will raise up for you

Quote: ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression raise up does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in 2:24 and 2:32. In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you”

your brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Moses is using the term brothers to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen”

You will listen to him according to everything

Quote: αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you”

You will listen to him according to everything

Quote: αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you”

Acts 3:23

But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people

Quote: ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people”

every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people

Quote: πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility.

every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people

Quote: πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet”

every soul that

Quote: πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Moses is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who”

that does not listen to that prophet

Quote: ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet”

Acts 3:24

all the prophets

Quote: πάντες & οἱ προφῆται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here the phrase all the prophets is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in 3:18. It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets announced these days. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them.

from Samuel and those after him

Quote: ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς (1)

Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”

these days

Quote: τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Peter is using the word days to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times”

these days

Quote: τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now”

Acts 3:25

You are the sons of the prophets

Quote: ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the word sons in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold”

the sons

Quote: οἱ υἱοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term sons is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “the sons and daughters” to indicate this.

and of the covenant that God made with your fathers

Quote: καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The figurative sense of sons as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them”

with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed

Quote: πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed”

your fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, fathers means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors”

your fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this.

in your seed

Quote: ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The term seed means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility.

in your seed

Quote: ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

As the apostle Paul notes in Galatians 3:16, God used the singular form of the word seed when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant”

will all the families of the earth be blessed

Quote: ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth”

all the families of the earth

Quote: πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, families refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world”

Acts 3:26

God, having raised up his Servant, sent him

Quote: ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression raised up has the same meaning here as in 3:22. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him”

his Servant

Quote: τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ (1)

See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in 3:13. Alternate translation: “his Messiah”

turning each of you from your wickedness

Quote: τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, turning someone from something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:19. Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness”

turning each of you from your wickedness

Quote: τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wickedness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things”

Acts 4

Acts 4 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

“Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: Metaphor and faith)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.

Acts 4:1

as they were speaking

Quote: λαλούντων & αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking”

the captain of the temple

Quote: ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard”

the Sadducees

Quote: οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,”

the Sadducees

Quote: οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees”

Acts 4:2

greatly troubled because they were teaching

Quote: διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching”

proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that {is} from the dead

Quote: καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows the resurrection to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus”

that {is} from the dead

Quote: τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died”

Acts 4:3

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So”

they laid hands on them

Quote: ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun them refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them”

they laid hands on them

Quote: ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The expression laid hands on means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested them”

put them in custody

Quote: ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word custody, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them”

since it was already evening

Quote: ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in 4:5–6, would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night”

Acts 4:4

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story.

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

the number of the men

Quote: ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Luke is not using the word men in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate men as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,”

became about 5,000

Quote: ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word translated became could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000”

Acts 4:5

And it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose.

their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together

Quote: συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in 4:15. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together”

their rulers and elders and scribes

Quote: αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people”

were gathered together

Quote: συναχθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together”

Acts 4:6

Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas

Quote: Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke describes Annas as the high priest, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest”

Annas … Caiaphas, … John, … Alexander

Quote: Ἅννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are the names of four men. The John mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle.

as many as were from the high priestly family

Quote: ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ (1)

Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”

Acts 4:7

having set them in {their} midst, they asked them

Quote: στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns their and they refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them”

By what power or in what name have you done this

Quote: ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words power and name (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?”

in what name

Quote: ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority”

you

Quote: ὑμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since the council members are speaking to two men, you would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as them in its two instances in this verse.)

Acts 4:8

Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said

Quote: Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said”

Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said

Quote: Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said”

Rulers of the people and elders

Quote: ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the elders, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to Exodus 24:1, that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin”

of the people

Quote: τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the people means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel”

Acts 4:9

if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well

Quote: εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, a good deed to a sick man. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well”

we are being questioned

Quote: ἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us”

he was made well

Quote: οὗτος σέσωσται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy”

Acts 4:10

let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel

Quote: γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel”

let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel

Quote: γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective known expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know”

to you all

Quote: πᾶσιν ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun you refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us”

in the name

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority”

of Jesus Christ the Nazarene

Quote: Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

See how you translated this in 2:22 and 3:6. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth”

whom you crucified

Quote: ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified”

whom God raised from the dead

Quote: ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died”

Acts 4:11

He

Quote: οὗτός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun He refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus”

the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has become the head of the corner

Quote: ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is quoting from Psalm 118:22, and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text.

that was rejected by you, the builders

Quote: ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected”

the head of the corner

Quote: κεφαλὴν γωνίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building”

Acts 4:12

there is no salvation in anyone else

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation”

there is no salvation in anyone else

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save”

there is no other name under heaven given

Quote: οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven”

there is no other name … by which we must be saved

Quote: οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved”

under heaven

Quote: ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 2:5. Alternate translation: “on earth”

among men

Quote: ἐν ἀνθρώποις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people”

by which we must be saved

Quote: ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us”

we

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is using the word we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 4:13

seeing

Quote: θεωροῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the word seeing to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with”

the boldness of Peter and John

Quote: τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

Here the abstract noun boldness refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were”

realizing

Quote: καταλαβόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke”

they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus

Quote: ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the pronoun they refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun them. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus”

they were uneducated and ordinary men

Quote: ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words uneducated and ordinary mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all”

Acts 4:14

the man who had been healed

Quote: τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed”

who had been healed standing with them, they had nothing

Quote: σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing”

they had nothing to say in opposition

Quote: οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that anything the council members said in opposition would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account”

Acts 4:15

having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves

Quote: κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves”

the Sanhedrin

Quote: τοῦ Συνεδρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber”

Acts 4:16

What should we do to these men

Quote: τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As 4:21 indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question.

to everyone living in Jerusalem

Quote: πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem”

a notable sign

Quote: γνωστὸν σημεῖον (1)

Here the word sign has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”

Acts 4:17

so that it may not be spread unto more

Quote: ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it”

so that it may not be spread unto more

Quote: ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By it, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread”

unto more

Quote: ἐπὶ πλεῖον (1)

Alternate translation: “any further”

to speak in this name

Quote: λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus”

no longer to speak in this name to any of men

Quote: μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men”

to any of men

Quote: μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Here, men has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone”

Acts 4:18

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So”

summoning them, they commanded them

Quote: καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them”

neither to speak nor to teach

Quote: μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words speak and teach mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly”

in the name of Jesus

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus”

Acts 4:19

answering, Peter and John said

Quote: ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded”

answering, Peter and John said

Quote: ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in 4:19–20. (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in 4:8–12. Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf”

Whether it is right before God

Quote: εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right”

to listen to you rather than to God

Quote: ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God”

Acts 4:20

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Peter and John are using the word For to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that”

we … we have seen and heard

Quote: ἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter and John are using the word we to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

we are not able not to speak

Quote: οὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak”

Acts 4:21

So, having warned them further, they released them

Quote: οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them”

on account of the people

Quote: διὰ τὸν λαόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot”

they were all glorifying God

Quote: πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here, all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God”

Acts 4:22

For the man to whom this sign of healing had happened was more than 40 years old

Quote: ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because”

the man to whom this sign of healing had happened

Quote: ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking as if the healing had happened on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed”

this sign of healing

Quote: τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Luke is using the possessive form to describe a sign that consisted of a healing. The word sign has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing”

Acts 4:23

having been released

Quote: ἀπολυθέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John”

they came to {their} own people

Quote: ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people”

their} own people

Quote: τοὺς ἰδίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase their own people refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers”

the chief priests and the elders

Quote: οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

As Peter does in 4:8, here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin”

Acts 4:24

having heard, they raised

Quote: οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The phrase having heard refers to the other believers, but the pronoun they seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus (4:29). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised”

raised their voice

Quote: ἦραν φωνὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”

raised their voice

Quote: ἦραν φωνὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression they raised their voice is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud”

unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν (1)

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”

you {are

Quote: σὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal

The word you is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in 4:25–30. You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases.

having made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that {is} in them

Quote: ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists”

the heaven

Quote: τὸν οὐρανὸν (1)

The believers are using the word translated heaven in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”

Acts 4:25

the one having said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant

Quote: ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word mouth refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say”

one having said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, Why did the nations rage, and the peoples imagine useless things

Quote: τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, Psalm 2:1–2. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.”

our

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The believers are using the word our to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

of … father

Quote: τοῦ πατρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, father means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor”

servant

Quote: παιδός (1)

The believers are using the word servant here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in 3:13 and 3:26.

Why did the nations rage, and the peoples imagine useless things

Quote: ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things”

Why did the nations rage, and the peoples imagine useless things

Quote: ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things”

Why did the nations rage, and the peoples imagine useless things

Quote: ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!”

useless things

Quote: κενά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase useless things implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless”

Acts 4:26

The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ

Quote: παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in 4:25. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ”

The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same

Quote: παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same”

The kings of the earth took their stand

Quote: παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression took their stand describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines”

the rulers were gathered

Quote: οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered”

to the same

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ (1)

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.

the Lord … his Christ

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the word Lord refers to God and the word Christ refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah”

Acts 4:27

were gathered together

Quote: συνήχθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together”

in this city

Quote: ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase this city refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem”

Servant

Quote: παῖδά (1)

Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13 and 3:26. Alternate translation: “Messiah”

whom you anointed

Quote: ὃν ἔχρισας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed”

Acts 4:28

all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen

Quote: ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hand means God’s power and counsel means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen”

all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen

Quote: ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

The words hand and counsel, joined by and, are expressing a single idea. The word hand, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his counsel, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power”

all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen

Quote: ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

The believers are speaking of God’s hand and his counsel (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had predetermined what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power”

Acts 4:29

And now, Lord

Quote: καὶ τὰ νῦν (1)

The believers use the expression And now to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.

look upon their threats

Quote: ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase look upon is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made”

to your servants

Quote: τοῖς δούλοις σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants”

your word

Quote: τὸν λόγον σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The believers are using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

with all boldness

Quote: μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly”

Acts 4:30

as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen

Quote: ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the hand represents God’s power. To stretch out the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen”

signs and wonders

Quote: σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation: “great miracles”

through the name

Quote: διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority”

the name of your holy Servant Jesus

Quote: τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ (1)

Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13, 3:26, and 4:27. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”

Acts 4:31

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story.

in which they were gathered together

Quote: ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together”

was shaken

Quote: ἐσαλεύθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook”

they were all filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all”

they were all filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all”

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God”

with boldness

Quote: μετὰ παρρησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly”

Acts 4:32

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information in 4:32–37 that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word Now with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language.

was one in heart and soul

Quote: ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the word heart seems to represent the emotions and the word soul seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility.

was one in heart and soul

Quote: ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms heart and soul mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united”

of the things that were to him

Quote: τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ (1)

Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”

everything was common to them

Quote: ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word everything may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:44. Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another”

Acts 4:33

of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus

Quote: τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died”

and great grace was upon them all

Quote: χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in 4:32. It does not refer just to the apostles, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers”

and great grace was upon them all

Quote: χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word grace, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers”

Acts 4:34

For there was not anyone needy among them

Quote: οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of For.

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke uses the word For in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that”

for

Quote: γὰρ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke uses the word for in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that”

for as many as were owners of lands or houses

Quote: ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The phrase as many as is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses”

the price of the things being sold

Quote: τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold”

Acts 4:35

they were laying it at the feet of the apostles

Quote: ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The expression laying it at the feet indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles”

they were laying it at the feet of the apostles

Quote: ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles”

it was being distributed

Quote: διεδίδετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it”

to each one, according as anyone had need

Quote: ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word need, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed”

Acts 4:36

Then Joseph

Quote: Ἰωσὴφ δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Joseph, … Barnabas

Quote: Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Joseph and Barnabas are two names for the same man.

called Barnabas by the apostles

Quote: ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas”

which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement

Quote: ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form being translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement”

which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement

Quote: ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when translated from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic”

Son of Encouragement

Quote: υἱὸς παρακλήσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression Son of describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager”

Son of Encouragement

Quote: υἱὸς παρακλήσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word Encouragement, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages”

Acts 4:37

that was to him

Quote: ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ (1)

See how you translated the similar expression in 4:32. Alternate translation: “that he owned”

laid it at the feet of the apostles

Quote: ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

See how you translated the similar expression in 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles”

Acts 5

Acts 5 General Notes

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)

No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1–10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Long sentences

Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

Acts 5:1

Now a certain man

Quote: ἀνὴρ δέ τις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Ananias

Quote: Ἁνανίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Ananias is the name of a man.

with Sapphira his wife

Quote: σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Sapphira

Quote: Σαπφείρῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Sapphira is the name of a woman.

Acts 5:2

he kept back from the price

Quote: ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could state why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous”

his} wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid it

Quote: συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν (1)

It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”

he laid it at the feet of the apostles

Quote: παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in 4:37. Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles”

Acts 5:3

why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land

Quote: διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!”

why has Satan filled your heart

Quote: διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is speaking of the heart of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had filled. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly”

your heart

Quote: τὴν καρδίαν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives”

for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land

Quote: ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit”

for you to lie to the Holy Spirit

Quote: ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us”

and to keep back from the price

Quote: καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself”

Acts 5:4

While it remained, did it not remain yours, and being sold, was it {not} in your authority

Quote: οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.”

While it remained

Quote: ἔμενεν (1)

Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”

being sold

Quote: πραθὲν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it”

was it {… in your authority

Quote: ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun it refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received”

was it {… in your authority

Quote: ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift”

How {is it} that you placed this thing in your heart

Quote: τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!”

How {is it} that you placed this thing in your heart

Quote: τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!”

How {is it} that you placed this thing in your heart

Quote: τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter speaks of this thing, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had placed it in his heart, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!”

You have not lied to men, but to God

Quote: οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Ananaias actually has lied to men, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us”

to men

Quote: ἀνθρώποις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings”

Acts 5:5

And hearing these words

Quote: ἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term words to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said”

falling down, expired

Quote: πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

The word translated expired means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died”

falling down, expired

Quote: πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground”

great fear came upon all the ones having heard

Quote: ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke describes this fear as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God”

Acts 5:6

So rising up, the young men wrapped him up

Quote: ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression rising up means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up”

the young men

Quote: οἱ νεώτεροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks”

wrapped him up

Quote: συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial”

Acts 5:7

And an interval of about three hours happened, and

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,”

his wife

Quote: ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun his refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira”

what had happened

Quote: τὸ γεγονὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead”

Acts 5:8

said to her

Quote: ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν (1)

The word translated said means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”

you sold

Quote: ἀπέδοσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.

for so much.” … Yes, for so much

Quote: τοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money”

Acts 5:9

How {is it} that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord

Quote: τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!”

it was agreed together by you

Quote: συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together”

by you … your … you

Quote: ὑμῖν & σου & σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

The word you in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word your and the word you in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular.

to test the Spirit of the Lord

Quote: πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου (1)

Here the word test means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”

to test the Spirit of the Lord

Quote: πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in 5:3 and 5:4. Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles”

Behold, the feet

Quote: ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter says Behold to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet”

the feet of the ones having buried your husband {are} at the door

Quote: οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their feet represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The door represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning”

the feet of the ones having buried your husband {are} at the door

Quote: οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning”

and they will carry you out

Quote: καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will carry her out to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you”

Acts 5:10

she fell down at his feet and expired

Quote: ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

The word translated expired means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died”

she fell down at his feet and expired

Quote: ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet”

she fell down at his feet

Quote: ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him”

the young men

Quote: οἱ νεανίσκοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated this expression in 5:6. However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these young men were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias”

Acts 5:11

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story.

great fear came upon the whole church and upon all the ones hearing these things

Quote: ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke describes this fear as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:5. Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God”

Acts 5:12

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce background information in 5:12–16 that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now”

many signs and wonders were happening through … hands of the apostles … the

Quote: διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the hands of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders”

signs and wonders

Quote: σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles”

they were all

Quote: ἦσαν & πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was”

unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν (1)

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”

the Porch of Solomon

Quote: τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11, which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch”

Acts 5:13

none of the others

Quote: τῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The expression the others refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus”

dared to join them

Quote: ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why no unbelievers dared to join them. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus (4:18), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in 5:28, the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so”

Acts 5:14

were being added to the Lord

Quote: προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke says the Lord to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church”

were being added to the Lord

Quote: προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:41. Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church”

to the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

Acts 5:15

so that

Quote: ὥστε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke says so that to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in 5:12, that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of 5:12–15 could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in 5:12. However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in 5:12 about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing.

they … carried

Quote: ἐκφέρειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried”

the sick

Quote: τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick”

cots and mats

Quote: κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words cots and mats mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds”

his} shadow might overshadow any one of them

Quote: ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person”

his} shadow might overshadow any one of them

Quote: ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν (1)

Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”

Acts 5:16

the sick

Quote: ἀσθενεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the expression the sick in 5:15. Alternate translation: “people who were sick”

those afflicted by unclean spirits

Quote: ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting”

who were all healed

Quote: οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all”

who were all healed

Quote: οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

It does not appear that all is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat all as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here.

Acts 5:17

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Luke uses the word But to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,”

rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy

Quote: ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

The high priest and these Sadducees were first filled with jealousy and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up”

rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy

Quote: ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form were filled. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up”

rising up

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression rising up means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action”

all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees

Quote: πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase all those with him means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the Sadducees. As a note to 4:1 explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection”

were filled with jealousy

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word jealousy, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous”

were filled with jealousy

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy filled. Alternate translation: “became very jealous”

Acts 5:18

they laid hands on the apostles

Quote: ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The expression laid hands on means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles”

they laid hands on the apostles

Quote: ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles”

Acts 5:19

bringing them out

Quote: ἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out”

Acts 5:20

in the temple

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the angel says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard”

all the words of this life

Quote: πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The angel is using the term words to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life”

of this life

Quote: τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης (1)

Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”

Acts 5:21

having heard this

Quote: ἀκούσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel”

into the temple

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard”

about daybreak

Quote: ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light”

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,”

having arrived

Quote: παραγενόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This does not mean that the high priest and his allies arrived in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber”

the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel

Quote: τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase even all the elders of the sons of Israel clarifies the name Sanhedrin by describing it membership. Luke is using the word elders here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in 4:5. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel”

of the sons of Israel

Quote: τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, sons means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel”

sent to the prison

Quote: ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison”

Acts 5:23

We found the prison shut in all security and the guards

Quote: τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form shut, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards”

in all security

Quote: ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word security, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely”

having opened

Quote: ἀνοίξαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Your language may require you to specify the object of opened. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors”

we found no one inside

Quote: ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

By no one, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside”

Acts 5:24

these words

Quote: τοὺς λόγους τούτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term words to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report”

concerning them

Quote: περὶ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them does not refer to the apostles but to the words that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them”

as to what this might become

Quote: τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression what this might become refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result”

Acts 5:25

Behold, the men

Quote: ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

This person says Behold to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men”

you put

Quote: ἔθεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

Here the word you refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural.

standing in the temple

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard”

Acts 5:26

Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them

Quote: τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun them refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did”

Acts 5:27

And having brought them

Quote: ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back”

Acts 5:28

We commanded you with a command

Quote: παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν (1)

For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”

you … you have filled … your … you desire

Quote: ὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

In this verse the words you and your refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural.

in this name

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The high priest is using the term name to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus”

behold, you have filled

Quote: ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The high priest says behold to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled”

you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching

Quote: πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The high priest is speaking of the city of Jerusalem as if it were a container that the apostles had filled with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem”

you desire to bring upon us

Quote: βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The high priest is speaking as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for”

us

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

the blood

Quote: τὸ αἷμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The high priest is using the term blood to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death”

of this man

Quote: τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase this man refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus”

Acts 5:29

answering, Peter and the apostles said

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded”

Peter and the apostles said

Quote: Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles”

men

Quote: ἀνθρώποις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings”

Acts 5:30

of our fathers

Quote: τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors”

of our fathers

Quote: τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this.

raised up Jesus

Quote: ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life”

whom you killed

Quote: ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

The word you is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed”

whom you killed

Quote: ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed”

having hung him on a tree

Quote: κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word translated tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross”

having hung him on a tree

Quote: κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In some languages the word hung would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross”

Acts 5:31

this one

Quote: τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus”

to his right

Quote: τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to his right side”

to his right

Quote: τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

God placing Jesus at his right side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him”

to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel

Quote: τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and forgiveness, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins”

to Israel

Quote: Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Peter is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel”

Acts 5:32

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word we to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles”

and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him

Quote: καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things”

whom God has given to those obeying him

Quote: ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus”

Acts 5:33

having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them

Quote: οἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the council members and the pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles”

Acts 5:34

a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name

Quote: τις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Gamaliel

Quote: Γαμαλιήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Gamaliel is the name of a man.

a law teacher, honored by all the people

Quote: νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does.

honored by all the people

Quote: τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored”

honored by all the people

Quote: τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored”

rising up

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Here, rising up means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say”

commanded to put the apostles outside

Quote: ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Your language may require you to specify the object of commanded. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside”

for a little

Quote: βραχὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective little as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while”

Acts 5:35

And

Quote: τε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then”

Men, Israelites

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites”

pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men

Quote: προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could state that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as 5:33 says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later”

Acts 5:36

before these days

Quote: πρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Gamaliel is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago”

Theudas

Quote: Θευδᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Theudas is the name of a man.

rose up

Quote: ἀνέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

In this context, rose up means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled”

saying himself to be somebody

Quote: λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context, the expression somebody means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person”

to whom was joined a number of men

Quote: ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him”

who was killed

Quote: ὃς ἀνῃρέθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him”

as many as were persuaded by him

Quote: ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded”

were dispersed

Quote: διελύθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed”

and they came to nothing

Quote: καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν (1)

Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”

Acts 5:37

After this one

Quote: μετὰ τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas”

Judas the Galilean

Quote: Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Judas is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in 1:13 and 1:16. (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) Galilean is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in 1:11.

rose up

Quote: ἀνέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

As in 5:36, rose up here means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled”

in the days of the census

Quote: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Gamaliel is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census”

drew away people after him

Quote: ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, drew away is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion”

That one also

Quote: κἀκεῖνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also”

as many as were persuaded by him

Quote: ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language would not use the passive form were persuaded, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded”

were scattered

Quote: διεσκορπίσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered”

Acts 5:38

And now I say these things to you

Quote: καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν (1)

Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Gamaliel is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So”

Keep away from these men and release them

Quote: ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς (1)

When Gamaliel tells the council to keep away from these men, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as 5:33 says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”

if this counsel or this work is from men

Quote: ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο (1)

Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”

men

Quote: ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Gamaliel is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts from men here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans”

it will be destroyed

Quote: καταλυθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last”

Acts 5:39

but

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were from God. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,”

if it is from God

Quote: εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the pronoun it refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work”

lest

Quote: μήποτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to state the implications of the word lest explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,”

you may even be found God-opposers

Quote: καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (See: next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be”

you may … be found

Quote: εὑρεθῆτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The expression be found means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be”

they were persuaded by him

Quote: ἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them”

Acts 5:40

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So”

summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them

Quote: προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them”

to speak in the name of Jesus

Quote: λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The Sanhedrin members are using the term name to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus”

Acts 5:41

from the face of the Sanhedrin

Quote: ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the word face to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin”

they had been considered worthy

Quote: κατηξιώθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language would not use the passive form had been considered, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy”

for the Name

Quote: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the Name means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus”

Acts 5:42

And

Quote: τε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story.

in the temple

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard”

they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel

Quote: οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel”

Acts 6

Acts 6 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Acts 6:7 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“His face was like the face of an angel”

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.

Acts 6:1

Now in those days

Quote: ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

in those days

Quote: ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time”

by the Hellenists

Quote: τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs.

their widows were being overlooked in the daily serving

Quote: παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows”

in the daily serving

Quote: ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word service, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day”

Acts 6:2

So

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word So to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.

the … Twelve

Quote: οἱ δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility.

the … Twelve

Quote: οἱ δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits.

to leave behind the word of God

Quote: καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The apostles are speaking as if they would walk away from the word of God and leave it behind them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God”

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God”

to serve tables

Quote: διακονεῖν τραπέζαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution”

Acts 6:3

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers”

men of good reputation

Quote: ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The expression being attested is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust”

full of the Spirit and of wisdom

Quote: πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom”

full of the Spirit and of wisdom

Quote: πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely”

over this task

Quote: ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

When the apostles say that they will appoint these men over the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task”

Acts 6:4

of the word

Quote: τοῦ λόγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The apostles are using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus”

Acts 6:5

the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude

Quote: ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the word before to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers”

So

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So”

Stephen, … Philip, … Prochorus, … Nicanor, … Timon, … Parmenas, … Nicolaus

Quote: Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers.

a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present”

a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present”

from Antioch

Quote: Ἀντιοχέα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The name Antiochian describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch”

Acts 6:6

having prayed, they placed their hands upon them

Quote: προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them”

they placed their hands upon them

Quote: ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The apostles placed their hands on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority”

Acts 6:7

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story.

the word of God kept spreading

Quote: ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were growing. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God”

the word of God kept spreading

Quote: ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread”

became obedient to the faith

Quote: ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke speaks generally of the faith (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests became obedient to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings”

became obedient to the faith

Quote: ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings”

Acts 6:8

Now Stephen

Quote: Στέφανος δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you could use it here in your translation.

Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing

Quote: Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that grace and power were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing”

Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing

Quote: Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Luke may be using the two words grace and power together to express a single idea. The word grace would describe the character of the power that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing”

Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing

Quote: Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words grace and power, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing”

great wonders and signs

Quote: τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles”

Acts 6:9

there arose

Quote: ἀνέστησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression rose up means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen”

the synagogue that is called Freedmen

Quote: τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen”

the synagogue that is called Freedmen

Quote: τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word Freedmen probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended”

of the Cyrenians, … of the Alexandrians, … Cilicia … Asia

Quote: Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cyrenians is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word Alexandrians is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words Cilicia and Asia are the names of two Roman provinces.

Acts 6:10

they were not able to stand against

Quote: οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context, the expression stand against means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against”

the wisdom and the Spirit by whom he spoke

Quote: τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Luke may be using the two words wisdom and Spirit together to express a single idea. The word Spirit would describe the source and character of the wisdom that Stephen was displaying. The word Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke”

the wisdom and the Spirit by whom he spoke

Quote: τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him”

Acts 6:11

they bribed men to say

Quote: ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word instigated means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying”

We have heard

Quote: ἀκηκόαμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The men are using the word We to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

speak blasphemous words

Quote: λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The men are using the term words to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things”

Acts 6:12

They … stirred up

Quote: συνεκίνησάν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in 6:9.

They also stirred up the people and the elders and the scribes

Quote: συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke says that Stephen’s opponents stirred up these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen”

Acts 6:13

does not stop speaking

Quote: οὐ παύεται λαλῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb stop. Alternate translation: “continually speaks”

speaking words

Quote: λαλῶν ῥήματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The men are using the term words to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things”

the holy place

Quote: τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a holy place. Alternate translation: “the temple”

Acts 6:14

this place

Quote: τὸν τόπον τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By this place, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple”

the customs that Moses handed down to us

Quote: τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The phrase handed down is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation”

Acts 6:15

saw his face as the face of an angel

Quote: εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like the face of an angel. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel”

Acts 7

Acts 7 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in 6:13–14. Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin. - (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him - (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses - (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law - (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave - (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built - (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build - (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members - (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50.

A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Stephen said”

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

“Full of the Holy Spirit”

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in 7:58, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: Metonymy)

Important Textual issues in this Chapter

“a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46)

In 7:46, some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: Textual Variants)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes.

Reference of “our” and “you”

Throughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.

Acts 7:1

the high priest

Quote: ὁ ἀρχιερεύς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Connecting Statement:

Luke assumes that his readers will know that the high priest was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,”

Acts 7:2

Then he said

Quote: ὁ δὲ ἔφη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said”

Men, brothers and fathers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase Men, brothers and fathers is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine”

Men, brothers and fathers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word brothers to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word fathers to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel”

The God of glory

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun glory with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility.

The God of glory

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in 6:11 that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the God of glory acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,”

our

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word our to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

to our father Abraham

Quote: τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the term father to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor”

Acts 7:3

he said to him, ‘Go out from your land and from your relatives, and come into the land that I will show you

Quote: εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him”

he said to him

Quote: εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to God, while the pronoun him refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham”

Acts 7:4

he lived … his … he brought him

Quote: κατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns his and him and the first instance of the word he refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word he refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.”

you

Quote: ὑμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you

The word you is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 7:5

he did not give him … he promised … to him … his … him—although he did not have

Quote: οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns him and his and the third instance of he refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of he refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.”

he did not give him an inheritance in it

Quote: οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ (1)

Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”

not even a footstep

Quote: οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground”

to him for a possession, and to his seed after him

Quote: αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The term seed means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him”

to him for a possession, and to his seed after him

Quote: αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun possession with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess”

Acts 7:6

But God spoke to him like this, that his seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and that they would enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years

Quote: ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’”

God spoke to him like this

Quote: ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that”

his seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and that they would enslave him and treat him badly

Quote: ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Stephen is using the singular word seed to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun stranger and the singular pronoun him. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could state “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun them. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly”

Acts 7:7

But I will judge the nation that will enslave him,’ said God, ‘and after that they will come out and serve me in this place

Quote: καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place”

the nation

Quote: τὸ ἔθνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, nation refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation”

will enslave him

Quote: ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

As in 7:6, Stephen is using the singular pronoun him because he is using the singular word seed to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them”

Acts 7:8

he gave him … he fathered

Quote: ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun he refers to God, while the word him and the second instance of the pronoun he refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.”

he gave him the covenant of circumcision

Quote: ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen’s listeners would have known that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family”

Isaac … Jacob

Quote: τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These are the names of two men.

and Isaac, Jacob; and Jacob, the 12 patriarchs

Quote: καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs”

the 12 patriarchs

Quote: τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word patriarchs to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel”

Acts 7:9

the patriarchs

Quote: οἱ πατριάρχαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Here the word patriarchs refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers”

sold him into Egypt

Quote: ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt”

was with him

Quote: ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

When Stephen says that God was with Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him”

Acts 7:10

he rescued him from all his afflictions, and he gave him

Quote: ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In these phrases the word he refers to God and the words him and his refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph”

he gave him favor and wisdom before Pharaoh

Quote: ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns favor and wisdom with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice”

before Pharaoh

Quote: ἐναντίον Φαραὼ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the phrase before Pharaoh may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility.

before Pharaoh

Quote: ἐναντίον Φαραὼ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The phrase before Pharaoh could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective”

he appointed him governor over Egypt and all his household

Quote: κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In these phrases the words he and his refer to Pharaoh and the word him refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household”

over Egypt

Quote: ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt”

all his household

Quote: ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word household refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned”

Acts 7:11

came a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and great tribulation

Quote: ἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here, Stephen speaks of famine and tribulation as if they came to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation”

and great tribulation

Quote: καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly”

our fathers

Quote: οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

Acts 7:12

there was grain in Egypt

Quote: ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt”

sent our fathers first

Quote: ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By first, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food”

our fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

Acts 7:13

during the second {time

Quote: ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Stephen is using the adjective second as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds time to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food”

during the second {time

Quote: ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip”

Joseph was made known to his brothers

Quote: ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother”

the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh

Quote: φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The phrase became known is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family”

Acts 7:14

sending them back, Joseph summoned Jacob

Quote: ἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob”

in souls 75

Quote: ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people”

Acts 7:15

Jacob went down to Egypt

Quote: κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen says that Jacob went down because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt”

he and our fathers died

Quote: ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they died as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died”

he and our fathers

Quote: αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors”

Acts 7:16

they were carried over to Shechem and laid

Quote: μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them”

for a price in silver

Quote: τιμῆς ἀργυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used silver as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money”

Acts 7:17

And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied

Quote: καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

In your language it may be helpful to say that the people increased and multiplied before saying that the time of the promise approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached”

as the time of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham approached

Quote: καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Stephen is speaking of this time as if it were a person and could have approached on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham”

as the time of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham approached

Quote: καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen is referring to the promise that he described in 7:7. God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,”

the people increased and multiplied

Quote: ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Stephen is using the two words increased and multiplied together to express a single idea. The word multiplied tells in what way the people increased. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly”

Acts 7:18

another king arose over Egypt

Quote: ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

When Stephen says that this next king arose, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt”

over Egypt

Quote: ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt”

who did not know Joseph

Quote: ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen is not saying that this king did not know Joseph personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, Joseph refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt”

Acts 7:19

He

Quote: οὗτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

He refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king”

our} fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

our} fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term fathers is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense.

to make their babies exposed, … them

Quote: τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by exposed he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside”

in order not to keep … alive

Quote: εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the verb keep alive, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them”

Acts 7:20

At that time

Quote: ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous

Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,”

Moses was born

Quote: ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Stephen introduces Moses into his story. See how you translated his name in 3:22.

Moses was born

Quote: ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place”

he was beautiful to God

Quote: ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This could mean: (1) that Moses was beautiful in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very beautiful. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful”

He was raised … in the house of {his} father

Quote: ὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home”

Acts 7:21

But when he was exposed

Quote: ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

Moses was exposed because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside”

took him up

Quote: ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus 2:1–10.) Alternate translation: “rescued him”

Acts 7:22

Moses was educated in all the wisdom of the Egyptians

Quote: ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom”

in all the wisdom of the Egyptians

Quote: πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Stephen says all as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians”

mighty in his words and works

Quote: δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ (1)

Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”

Acts 7:23

when a 40-year time was filled to him

Quote: ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty”

when a 40-year time was filled to him

Quote: ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here.

it came up on his heart

Quote: ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression it came up on his heart means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire”

it came up on his heart

Quote: ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, heart is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire”

his brothers, the sons of Israel

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob”

his brothers, the sons of Israel

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms brothers and sons are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this.

Acts 7:24

seeing a certain one being mistreated

Quote: ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Egyptian who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite”

made vengeance for the one being oppressed, striking the Egyptian

Quote: ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him”

striking the Egyptian

Quote: πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian”

Acts 7:25

his} brothers

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen”

was giving salvation to them

Quote: δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery”

by his hand

Quote: διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hand refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions”

Acts 7:26

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men”

to them … them … you are … you are hurting

Quote: αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of them and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural.

he urged them to peace

Quote: συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting”

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other”

Men

Quote: ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends”

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Moses is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen”

Why is it that you are hurting each other

Quote: ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!”

Acts 7:27

him

Quote: αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The word him refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses”

saying, ‘Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us

Quote: εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them”

Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us

Quote: τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!”

a ruler and a judge

Quote: ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

In this context, the words ruler and judge mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power”

us

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The man is using the word our to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 7:28

You do not want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you

Quote: μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding do you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday”

You do not want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you

Quote: μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!”

You do not want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you

Quote: μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.”

the way

Quote: ὃν τρόπον (1)

Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”

Acts 7:29

Moses ran away at this word

Quote: ἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished”

at this word

Quote: ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen is using the term word to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement”

where he fathered two sons

Quote: οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons”

Acts 7:30

40 years having been filled

Quote: πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by”

40 years having been filled

Quote: πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here.

an angel appeared to him

Quote: ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word appeared does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses”

an angel appeared to him

Quote: ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the angel. The UST makes this explicit.

Acts 7:31

admired the sight

Quote: ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses admired the sight because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush”

the voice of the Lord came

Quote: ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Stephen is speaking of the voice of the Lord as if it were a person and that it came on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him”

Acts 7:32

I am the God of your fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob

Quote: ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob”

Acts 7:33

the Lord said to him, ‘Untie the sandal of your feet, for the place on which you are standing is holy ground

Quote: εἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground”

Untie the sandal of your feet, for the place on which you are standing is holy ground

Quote: λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground”

Untie the sandal of your feet

Quote: λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet”

the sandal of your feet

Quote: τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of sandals. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”

for the place on which you are standing is holy ground

Quote: ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence”

Acts 7:34

I have certainly seen the oppression of my people who {are} in Egypt, and I have heard their groaning, and I have come down to rescue them. And now come, let me send you to Egypt

Quote: ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt”

I have certainly seen

Quote: ἰδὼν, εἶδον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb seen is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language.

of my people

Quote: τοῦ λαοῦ μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

God uses the possessive word my to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob”

I have come down to rescue them

Quote: κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God describes himself as having come down from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means that he is taking action to rescue them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release”

And

Quote: καὶ (3)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

God is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So”

now come

Quote: νῦν δεῦρο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready”

let me send you to Egypt

Quote: ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says let me send you to Egypt. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt”

Acts 7:35-38

This Moses

Quote: τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany

Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says This Moses, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases.

Acts 7:35

saying, ‘Who appointed you a ruler and a judge

Quote: εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in 7:27. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge”

Who appointed you a ruler and a judge

Quote: τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

See how you translated this rhetorical question in 7:27. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!”

a ruler and a judge

Quote: ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

See how you translated the combination of ruler and judge in 7:27. Alternate translation: “an authority with power”

a redeemer

Quote: λυτρωτὴν (1)

In this context, the word translated redeemer refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”

with the hand of the angel

Quote: σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hand is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel”

appeared to him in the bush

Quote: ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated the word appeared in 7:30. Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush”

Acts 7:36

wonders and signs

Quote: τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “great miracles”

the Red Sea

Quote: Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, the Red Sea, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds”

Acts 7:37

who said to the sons of Israel, ‘God will raise up a prophet like me for you from your brothers

Quote: ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers”

to the sons of Israel

Quote: τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob”

will raise up a prophet like me for you

Quote: προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the expression raise up describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me”

your brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen”

Acts 7:38

This is the one having been

Quote: οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

This is the one refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was”

with the angel {who was} speaking to him on Mount Sinai, and with our fathers, who received living words

Quote: μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

It might be more natural to put the information about Mount Sinai next to the information about Moses receiving living words. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words”

with our fathers, who received

Quote: τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

This second instance of who in the verse refers to Moses, not to the fathers. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received”

who received living words

Quote: ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the words that he received. Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words”

living words

Quote: λόγια ζῶντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen is using the term words to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message”

living words

Quote: λόγια ζῶντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the term living to describe God’s words as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message”

Acts 7:39

to whom our fathers were not willing to be obedient

Quote: ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The word whom refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses”

they pushed him away

Quote: ἀπώσαντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is speaking to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader”

turned back in their hearts to Egypt

Quote: ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hearts is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt”

Acts 7:40

saying to Aaron, ‘Make for us gods who will go ahead of us. For this Moses, who brought us from the land of Egypt, we do not know what has happened to him

Quote: εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt”

saying to Aaron

Quote: εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών (1)

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”

For this Moses, who brought us from the land of Egypt, we do not know what has happened to him

Quote: ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt”

Acts 7:41

they made an image of a calf

Quote: ἐμοσχοποίησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this image of a calf was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as the idol later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol”

in those days

Quote: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time”

they made an image of a calf

Quote: ἐμοσχοποίησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf”

the works of their hands

Quote: τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen describes what he also calls the calf and the idol as the works of their hands by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made”

Acts 7:42

God turned away

Quote: ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is speaking as if God had physically turned away. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them”

the host of heaven

Quote: τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the word host means “army,” and the word heaven means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky”

it is written in the book of the prophets

Quote: γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records”

the book of the prophets

Quote: βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets”

You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, did you

Quote: μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel

Quote: μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding did you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?”

You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel

Quote: μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of Israel that they did not really worship Him in the wilderness with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!”

You did not offer … did you

Quote: μὴ & προσηνέγκατέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

You is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (house) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular you in your translation.

slain beasts and offerings

Quote: σφάγια καὶ θυσίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (slain beasts) and those that are bloodless (offerings), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices”

O house of Israel

Quote: οἶκος Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel”

Acts 7:43

And you took up the tabernacle of Molech and the star of your god Rephan— the images that you made to worship them— … I will remove you beyond Babylon

Quote: καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. (1)

The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

And at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, 7:42: “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me … , did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!”

you took up … I will remove you

Quote: ἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

The term took up indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term remove in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away”

you took up … your … you made … you

Quote: ἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

As in 7:42, you is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse your is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation.

the tabernacle of Molech

Quote: τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The tabernacle of Molech was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as UST does.

the star of your god Rephan

Quote: τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Israelites were not carrying around an actual star, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan”

the images that you made

Quote: τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word images refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.”

and

Quote: καὶ (3)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated and to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result”

I will remove you beyond Babylon

Quote: μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse.

Acts 7:44

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: Connecting Statement: (0)

Connecting Statement:

Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.

The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness, just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded

Quote: ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Stephen is not saying that the tabernacle was with the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built according to the pattern that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded”

The tabernacle of the testimony

Quote: ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen calls this tent the tabernacle of the testimony by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant”

just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded, to make it according to the pattern that he had seen

Quote: καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way”

the one speaking to Moses had commanded

Quote: διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai”

the pattern that he had seen

Quote: τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the pattern for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai”

Acts 7:45

which also our fathers, having received it in turn, brought in

Quote: ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns

The pronoun which refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in”

having received it in turn

Quote: διαδεξάμενοι (1)

The phrase having received … in turn translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”

brought in with Joshua

Quote: εἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ (1)

When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle with Joshua, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”

brought in

Quote: εἰσήγαγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan”

in the possessing of the nations

Quote: ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen is using the term nations to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations”

from the face of our fathers

Quote: ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word face to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there”

until the days of David

Quote: ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David”

the days of David

Quote: τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David”

Acts 7:46

to find

Quote: εὑρεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build”

who found favor before God

Quote: ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns

The pronoun who refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God”

who found favor before God

Quote: ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor”

to find

Quote: εὑρεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build”

a dwelling

Quote: σκήνωμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The word dwelling refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house”

for the house of Jacob

Quote: τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT.

for the house of Jacob

Quote: τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Jacob means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel”

Acts 7:47

the house for him

Quote: αὐτῷ οἶκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the word house to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him”

the house for him

Quote: αὐτῷ οἶκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God”

Acts 7:48

the Most High

Quote: ὁ Ὕψιστος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning.

houses} made with hands

Quote: χειροποιήτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Stephen is using the adjective made with hands (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds houses to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build”

houses} made with hands

Quote: χειροποιήτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Stephen is using the word hand, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build”

houses} made with hands

Quote: χειροποιήτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The word houses means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build”

as the prophet says

Quote: καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by the prophet, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says”

Acts 7:49

Heaven {is} my throne, and the earth {is} the footstool for my feet

Quote: ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

Heaven {is} my throne, and the earth {is} the footstool for my feet

Quote: ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Speaking through Isaiah, God describes Heaven as his throne and the earth as his footstool. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth”

Heaven {is} my throne, and the earth {is} the footstool for my feet

Quote: ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

God is using the two parts of creation, Heaven and earth, to mean all of creation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation”

What kind of house will you build for me? says the Lord, or what {is} the place for my rest

Quote: ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!”

What kind of house will you build for me? says the Lord, or what {is} the place for my rest

Quote: ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!”

What kind of house

Quote: ποῖον οἶκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The word house means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple”

the place for my rest

Quote: τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live”

Acts 7:50

Did my hand not make all these things

Quote: οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse.

Did my hand not make all these things

Quote: οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!”

Did my hand not make all these things

Quote: οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

God is using one part of himself, his hand, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!”

all these things

Quote: ταῦτα πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase all these things refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation”

Acts 7:51

O stiff-necked and uncircumcised in heart and ears

Quote: σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Stephen is using the exclamatory word O to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative O. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears”

O stiff-necked and

Quote: σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Stephen is using the adjective stiff-necked as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and”

O stiff-necked

Quote: σκληροτράχηλοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn”

uncircumcised in heart and ears

Quote: ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ heart and ears as uncircumcised by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God”

uncircumcised in heart and ears

Quote: ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Stephen is using one part of a person, the heart, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God”

uncircumcised in heart and ears

Quote: ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Stephen is using one part of a person, the ears, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God”

You always resist the Holy Spirit

Quote: ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word always is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit”

You … your … you

Quote: ὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

The words you and your are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

As your fathers, also you

Quote: ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him”

Acts 7:52

Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute

Quote: τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!”

Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute

Quote: τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!”

of the Righteous One

Quote: τοῦ Δικαίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Stephen is using the adjective Righteous as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds One to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous”

whose betrayers and murderers you have now become

Quote: οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε (1)

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”

Acts 7:53

who received

Quote: οἵτινες ἐλάβετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun who refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received”

who received

Quote: οἵτινες ἐλάβετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive the law themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received”

by directions of angels

Quote: εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in 7:38 that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai”

Acts 7:54

hearing these things, they were cut to their hearts

Quote: ἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them”

they were cut to their hearts

Quote: διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the expression they were cut to their hearts is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen”

they ground {their} teeth at him

Quote: ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen”

Acts 7:55

full of the Holy Spirit

Quote: πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit”

looking intently into heaven, he saw

Quote: ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision”

the glory of God

Quote: δόξαν Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God”

Jesus standing at the right of God

Quote: Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God”

Jesus standing at the right of God

Quote: Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God”

Jesus standing at the right of God

Quote: Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” at the right of God. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him”

Acts 7:56

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen”

I see the heavens opened, and

Quote: θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Stephen is speaking of the heavens being opened to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see”

the Son of Man

Quote: τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The title Son of Man is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah”

standing at the right of God

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the nominal adjective right in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God”

standing at the right of God

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase at the right of God in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God”

standing at the right of God

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus standing in 7:55. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me”

Acts 7:57

shouting with a loud voice, they covered their ears

Quote: κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more”

shouting with a loud voice

Quote: κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly”

shouting with a loud voice

Quote: κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)

If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”

rushed at him unanimously

Quote: ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν (1)

This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”

Acts 7:58

throwing him outside the city

Quote: ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members throwing Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city”

the witnesses

Quote: οἱ μάρτυρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in 6:13. According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,”

laid aside their outer garments at the feet of a young man named Saul

Quote: ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit.

outer garments

Quote: τὰ ἱμάτια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These outer garments were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes”

at the feet

Quote: παρὰ τοὺς πόδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression at the feet means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of”

Acts 7:59

as he was calling out and saying

Quote: ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase calling out tells how Stephen was saying what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly”

receive my spirit

Quote: δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit”

Acts 7:60

having put down {his} knees

Quote: θεὶς & τὰ γόνατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently”

he cried out with a loud voice

Quote: ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly”

do not hold this sin against them

Quote: μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them”

do not hold this sin against them

Quote: μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold … against. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin”

he fell asleep

Quote: ἐκοιμήθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says he fell asleep. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died”

Acts 8

Acts 8 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32–33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in Chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15–19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

Proclaimed

This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.

Acts 8:1

And Saul was agreeing with his execution

Quote: Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in 8:3 and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen”

And on that day a great persecution began against the church

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church”

on that day

Quote: ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, day is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,”

they all were scattered

Quote: πάντες & διεσπάρησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled”

they all were scattered

Quote: πάντες & διεσπάρησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word all is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled”

except the apostles

Quote: πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the apostles remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution”

Acts 8:1-2

And devout men carried away Stephen and made great lamentation over him

Quote: συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

It may be helpful to your readers to move the parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1–2 as the UST does.

Acts 8:2

carried away Stephen

Quote: συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word translated carried away means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it”

Acts 8:3

by houses

Quote: κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους (1)

Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”

by houses, … both men and women

Quote: κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke may mean houses where Christians met, as described in 2:46, and he means men and women who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women”

Acts 8:4

the ones having been scattered

Quote: οἱ & διασπαρέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the participle having been scattered, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered”

the ones having been scattered

Quote: οἱ & διασπαρέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in 8:1. Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution”

proclaiming the word

Quote: εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in 4:4. Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated proclaiming here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus”

Acts 8:5

going down

Quote: κατελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke speaks of Philip going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling”

the city of Samaria

Quote: τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria”

Christ

Quote: τὸν Χριστόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the name Christ by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus”

Acts 8:6

the crowds

Quote: οἱ ὄχλοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke implicitly means the crowds in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria”

unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν (1)

Alternate translation: “all together”

to the things being spoken by Philip

Quote: τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the participle being spoken, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying”

to the things being spoken by Philip

Quote: τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying”

the signs

Quote: τὰ σημεῖα (1)

Here the word signs has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”

Acts 8:7

For many of those having unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, they were coming out

Quote: πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had unclean spirits being the subject of the sentence to the unclean spirits themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people to such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them”

of those having

Quote: τῶν ἐχόντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the participle having, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term those to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had”

having unclean spirits

Quote: ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα (1)

Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”

shouting with a loud voice

Quote: βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly”

many … paralyzed and lame were healed

Quote: πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in 4:10. Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame”

many … paralyzed

Quote: πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the participle paralyzed as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed”

many … paralyzed

Quote: πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis”

Acts 8:8

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So”

there was much joy in that city

Quote: ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The phrase that city refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city”

there was much joy in that city

Quote: ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly”

Acts 8:9

But a certain man, Simon by name, was already practicing sorcery in the city

Quote: ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city”

a certain man, Simon by name

Quote: ἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Simon

Quote: Σίμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Simon is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in 1:13.

Acts 8:10

to whom they all, from little to great, were paying attention

Quote: ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The phrase to whom refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon”

all

Quote: πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke is using the word all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city”

from little to great

Quote: ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjectives little and great as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones”

from little to great

Quote: ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were”

This

Quote: οὗτός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun This stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man”

the power of God that is called Great

Quote: ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God”

that is called

Quote: ἡ καλουμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form called, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call”

Acts 8:11

And they were paying attention to him

Quote: προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him”

Acts 8:12

they believed

Quote: ἐπίστευσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed”

proclaiming the gospel about the kingdom of God and the name of Jesus Christ

Quote: εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come”

proclaiming the gospel about the kingdom of God and the name of Jesus Christ

Quote: εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the name of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title Christ indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come”

proclaiming the gospel about the kingdom of God and the name of Jesus Christ

Quote: εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Since Jesus inaugurated the kingdom of God when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule”

they were baptized

Quote: ἐβαπτίζοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them”

Acts 8:13

And Simon himself also believed

Quote: ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Luke uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed”

he was continuing with Philip

Quote: ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ (1)

Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”

having been baptized

Quote: βαπτισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him”

And seeing great signs and works

Quote: θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

The word that ULT translates as works here is the same word that it translates as “power” in 8:10. It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that works of power that are truly great are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here.

And … signs and works

Quote: τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms signs and works mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles”

Acts 8:14

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now”

having heard that Samaria had received the word of God, sent

Quote: ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent”

having heard that Samaria had received the word of God, sent

Quote: ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent”

Samaria

Quote: ἡ Σαμάρεια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the word Samaria by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria”

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

Acts 8:15

who, having come down, prayed for them

Quote: οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun who stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans”

who

Quote: οἵτινες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since the pronoun who stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form.

having come down

Quote: καταβάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke speaks of Philip having come down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem”

having come down

Quote: καταβάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down”

Acts 8:16

he had not yet fallen upon any of them

Quote: οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit”

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because”

he had not yet fallen upon any of them

Quote: οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here.

he had not yet fallen

Quote: οὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen”

they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus

Quote: μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the name of the Lord Jesus represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus”

they had only been baptized

Quote: μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers”

Acts 8:17

they were laying {their} hands on them, and they were receiving

Quote: ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun they stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them and the second instance of they stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving”

they were laying

Quote: ἐπετίθεσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since this instance of the pronoun they stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in 8:18 and “they” and “the ones” in 8:25.

they were laying {their} hands on them

Quote: ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Peter and John laying their hands on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation.

Acts 8:18

the Spirit was being given

Quote: δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit”

Acts 8:19

Give to me also this authority, so that on whomever I lay {my} hands, he may receive the Holy Spirit

Quote: δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον (1)

Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”

Acts 8:20

May your silver be with you unto destruction

Quote: τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!”

silver

Quote: τὸ ἀργύριόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is referring to money by association with the way that silver was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money”

the gift of God

Quote: τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it the gift of God. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit”

Acts 8:21

No part or share in this matter is to you

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms part and share mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work”

to you

Quote: σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

The phrase to you represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours”

because your heart is not right

Quote: ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right”

before God

Quote: ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This could mean: (1) that Simon’s heart is not right in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God”

Acts 8:22

of this wickedness of yours

Quote: ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wickedness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God”

the intention of your heart

Quote: ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing”

pray to the Lord, if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you

Quote: δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact

Peter is using the conditional word if to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart”

the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you

Quote: ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart”

Acts 8:23

in the gall of bitterness

Quote: εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The gall plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area.

in the gall of bitterness

Quote: εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the gall plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness”

in the gall of bitterness

Quote: εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is describing bitterness as if it were made of gall or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious”

the bond of unrighteousness

Quote: σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter speaks of the bond of unrighteousness as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning”

Acts 8:24

You … you have spoken

Quote: ὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as 8:18 describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, You and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural.

You pray to the Lord for me

Quote: δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me”

You pray to the Lord for me

Quote: δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Simon is stating the pronoun You, whose meaning is already present in the verb pray, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves”

so that nothing of which you have spoken may come upon me

Quote: ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε (1)

Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”

nothing of which you have spoken may come upon me

Quote: μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said”

Acts 8:25

Then

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Luke is using the word translated Then to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,”

the ones having testified and having spoken the word of the Lord

Quote: οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The ones Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,”

the ones having testified and having spoken

Quote: οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the participles having testified and having spoken, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken”

the word of the Lord

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

many villages of the Samaritans

Quote: πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The term villages refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages”

Acts 8:26

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

Arise

Quote: ἀνάστηθι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the word arise means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey”

the road going down from Jerusalem to Gaza

Quote: τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The angel speaks of the road going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza”

This is desert

Quote: αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’”

Acts 8:27

arising, he went

Quote: ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As in the previous verse, the word arising means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left”

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the word behold to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character.

a man, an Ethiopian, a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, who had come to Jerusalem to worship

Quote: ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship”

a man, an Ethiopian

Quote: ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia”

a eunuch, an official of the Kandake

Quote: εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

While the word eunuch describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake”

of the Kandake

Quote: Κανδάκης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Kandake was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name.

who was over all her treasure

Quote: ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was over the treasure of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury”

who had come to Jerusalem to worship

Quote: ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem”

who had come

Quote: ὃς ἐληλύθει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

Your language may say “gone” rather than come in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone”

Acts 8:28

chariot

Quote: τοῦ ἅρματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here and in 8:29 and 8:38, the term chariot probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage”

he was reading the prophet Isaiah

Quote: ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the phrase the prophet Isaiah to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah”

he was reading

Quote: ἀνεγίνωσκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as 8:30 explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from”

Acts 8:29

Approach and join this chariot

Quote: πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The Spirit means that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it”

Acts 8:30

reading Isaiah the prophet

Quote: ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the phrase Isaiah the prophet to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah”

Do you understand what you are reading

Quote: ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?”

Acts 8:31

For how would I be able, unless someone will guide me

Quote: πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.”

he invited Philip to sit with him, having come up

Quote: παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation”

Acts 8:32

He was led like a sheep to the slaughter

Quote: ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This a quotation from Isaiah 53:7–8. It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter”

He was led like a sheep to the slaughter

Quote: ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered”

He was led

Quote: ἤχθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him”

before its shearer {is} silent

Quote: ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off”

he does not open his mouth

Quote: οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This means that the Messiah does not speak by association with the way a person would open his mouth in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing”

Acts 8:33

In humiliation his justice was taken away

Quote: ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of humiliation and justice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly”

his justice was taken away

Quote: ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice”

Who will describe his generation

Quote: τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.”

Who will describe his generation

Quote: τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.”

Who will describe his generation

Quote: τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generation, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.”

his life is taken from the earth

Quote: αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth”

Acts 8:34

And answering, the eunuch said to Philip

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answering and said mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying”

I beg of you

Quote: δέομαί σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me”

some other

Quote: ἑτέρου τινός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In this context, the pronoun other means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person”

Acts 8:35

opening his mouth

Quote: ἀνοίξας & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

By association with the way a person would be opening his mouth in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently”

this scripture

Quote: τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By this scripture, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading”

proclaimed Jesus to him

Quote: εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the name Jesus by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus”

Acts 8:36

some water … water

Quote: τι ὕδωρ & ὕδωρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke and the official are using the word water to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water”

What is preventing my being baptized

Quote: τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in 8:37 by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?”

my being baptized

Quote: με βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me”

Acts 8:37

And Philip said to him, “If you believe from your whole heart, you will be saved.” And answering he said, “I believe in Christ, the Son of God

Quote: εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote.

If you believe from your whole heart

Quote: ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple”

you will be saved

Quote: σωθήσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you”

answering he said

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answering and said mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded”

Acts 8:38

he commanded the chariot to stop

Quote: ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term chariot by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop”

he baptized him

Quote: ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he stands for Philip, and the pronoun him stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch”

Acts 8:39

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

While the word translated for often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead went on his way. Rather, the word for seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless”

Acts 8:40

Philip was found at Azotus

Quote: Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus”

Philip was found at Azotus

Quote: Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus”

passing through

Quote: διερχόμενος (1)

Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”

to all the cities

Quote: τὰς πόλεις πάσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region”

Azotus … Caesarea

Quote: Ἄζωτον & Καισάρειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Azotus and Caesarea are the names of cities.

Acts 9

Acts 9 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

In 9:1, the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.

In 9:32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.

Acts 9:31 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”

The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

“The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.

“the church”

Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word church in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

“the Lord”

Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: Politeness)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.

Acts 9:1

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses the word translated But to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

breathing threat and murder against

Quote: ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Luke is using the two words threat and murder together to express a single idea. The word murder tells what kind of threat Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against”

breathing

Quote: ἐμπνέων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term breathing by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking”

Acts 9:2

him … he found … he might bring them

Quote: αὐτοῦ & εὕρῃ & ἀγάγῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun he refer to Saul.

letters

Quote: ἐπιστολὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these letters were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them.

to Damascus, to the synagogues

Quote: εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the terms Damascus and synagogues by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus”

being of the Way

Quote: τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

As the General Notes to this chapter explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way”

he might bring them bound to Jerusalem

Quote: δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests”

he might bring them bound to Jerusalem

Quote: δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests”

he might bring them bound to Jerusalem

Quote: δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them”

Acts 9:3

as he was traveling

Quote: ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him”

it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses the phrase it happened that to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose.

a light from heaven surrounded him

Quote: αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)

Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”

from heaven

Quote: ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)

This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.

Acts 9:4

falling to the ground

Quote: πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light”

why are you persecuting me

Quote: τί με διώκεις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!”

Acts 9:5

Who are you, Lord

Quote: τίς εἶ, κύριε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is Lord. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir”

he said, “… he {said

Quote: εἶπεν & ὁ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of he stands for Saul, and the second instance of he stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied”

are you, … you

Quote: εἶ & σὺ (1)

Both occurrences of the word you here are singular.

Acts 9:6

it will be told to you

Quote: λαληθήσεταί σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you”

Acts 9:8

his eyes being opened

Quote: ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes”

they brought him

Quote: εἰσήγαγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in 9:8. Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him”

Acts 9:9

he was not seeing for three days

Quote: ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων (1)

Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”

he neither ate nor drank

Quote: οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. 9:11 says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink”

Acts 9:10

Now there was a certain disciple in Damascus named Ananias

Quote: ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Ananias

Quote: Ἁνανίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in 5:1 (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there.

the Lord

Quote: ὁ Κύριος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Here and throughout this chapter, the Lord is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”

Behold, I, Lord

Quote: ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Behold, I is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias”

Behold, I, Lord

Quote: ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve the Lord. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask”

Acts 9:11

Arising, go to the street called Straight

Quote: ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word arising means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street”

the street called Straight

Quote: τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form called, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight”

the street called Straight

Quote: τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Straight is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street”

of Judas

Quote: Ἰούδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Judas it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in 1:13, 1:16, and 5:37 for the disciple and two other men with the same name.

for behold, he is praying

Quote: ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Lord says behold to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying”

Acts 9:12

laying hands on him

Quote: ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In this culture, laying hands on people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in 6:6 for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing”

Acts 9:13

from many

Quote: ἀπὸ πολλῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Ananias is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people”

how many evils

Quote: ὅσα κακὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evils, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things”

he has done to your saints in Jerusalem

Quote: τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Ananias is using the term saints by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you”

Acts 9:14

he has authority from the chief priests

Quote: ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him”

to bind

Quote: δῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest”

the ones calling upon your name

Quote: τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Ananias is using the participle calling, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name”

the ones calling upon your name

Quote: τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you”

the ones calling upon your name

Quote: τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the expression calling on means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you”

Acts 9:15

to me an instrument of choosing

Quote: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an instrument who is characterized by his choosing. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument”

this

Quote: οὗτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul”

to me an instrument of choosing

Quote: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Lord describes Saul as an instrument or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use”

to carry my name

Quote: τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Lord says that Saul will carry his name, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name”

to carry my name

Quote: τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me”

the nations

Quote: ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The term nations refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in 4:25. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles”

kings

Quote: βασιλέων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The Lord is using kings, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers”

the sons of Israel

Quote: υἱῶν & Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Lord is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites”

Acts 9:16

for my name

Quote: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake”

Acts 9:17

And Ananias departed, and entered into the house

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. UST models one way to express this.

having laid {his} hands on him

Quote: ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When Ananias laid his hands on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at 9:2 and see how you translated the same expression there.

to you … you were going—… you might see again

Quote: σοι & ἤρχου & ἀναβλέψῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

All of the occurrences of the word you in this verse are singular and refer to Saul.

Saul, brother

Quote: Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Brother is a figurative title that Ananias is using for Saul. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in 1:15 and 6:3. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in 3:17 and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite”

the one having appeared to you

Quote: ὁ ὀφθείς σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Ananias is using the participle having appeared, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you”

on which you were going

Quote: ᾗ ἤρχου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

Your language may say “coming” rather than going in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming”

so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form filled, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you”

be filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Ananias is speaking as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit”

Acts 9:18

scales

Quote: λεπίδες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the scales that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales”

he was baptized

Quote: ἐβαπτίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him”

Acts 9:19

he was strengthened

Quote: ἐνισχύθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger”

Acts 9:20

he proclaimed Jesus, that this is the Son of God

Quote: ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns

The personal pronoun he refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God”

Son of God

Quote: Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son of God is an important title for Jesus.

Acts 9:21

all the ones hearing

Quote: πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him”

the ones hearing … the one having destroyed … the ones calling on

Quote: οἱ ἀκούοντες & ὁ πορθήσας & τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the participles hearing, having destroyed, and calling on, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms ones and one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call”

Is not this the one having destroyed in Jerusalem the ones calling on this name? And he had come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests

Quote: οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!”

the ones calling on this name

Quote: τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By this name the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus”

the ones calling on this name

Quote: τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the name of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus”

the ones calling on this name

Quote: τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, calling on is an idiom. See how you translated it in 9:14. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus”

that he might bring them bound to the chief priests

Quote: ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests”

that he might bring them bound to the chief priests

Quote: ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Like Ananias in 9:14, the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests”

Acts 9:22

and stirring up the Jews living in Damascus, proving that Jesus is the Christ

Quote: καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Saul was not intentionally stirring up the Jews. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated”

Acts 9:23

when many days were filled

Quote: ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As in 2:1 and 7:23, this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days”

when many days were filled

Quote: ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here.

the Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

him

Quote: αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul”

Acts 9:24

But their plot became known to Saul

Quote: ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of But in the verse to “However.”

But their plot became known to Saul

Quote: ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot”

they were … watching the gates … in order to kill him

Quote: παρετηροῦντο & τὰς πύλας & ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city”

the gates

Quote: τὰς πύλας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the gates to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates”

both day and night

Quote: ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Luke is using the two parts of a full day, day and night, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time”

Acts 9:25

his disciples

Quote: οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

These disciples were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus”

Acts 9:26

they were all fearing him

Quote: πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him”

Acts 9:27

taking hold of him, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told them how he had seen the Lord on the road and that he had spoken to him, … he had spoken boldly

Quote: Βαρναβᾶς & ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ & ἐπαρρησιάσατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun he refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to the Lord in the second instance. The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly”

in the name of Jesus

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. Saul had spoken boldly with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus”

Acts 9:28

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So”

he was with them

Quote: ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Saul. The pronoun them refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers”

coming in and going out

Quote: εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them”

in the name of the Lord

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

See how you translated the similar expression in 9:27. Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord”

Acts 9:29

Hellenists

Quote: Ἑλληνιστάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in 6:1.

but they were attempting to kill him

Quote: οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him”

Acts 9:30

the brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers”

brought him down to Caesarea

Quote: κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke uses the phrase brought him down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea”

sent him away

Quote: ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship”

Acts 9:31

was having peace

Quote: εἶχεν εἰρήνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more”

being built up and journeying

Quote: οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could state “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed”

being built up

Quote: οἰκοδομουμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger”

journeying in the fear of the Lord

Quote: πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, journeying means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord”

journeying in the fear of the Lord

Quote: πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)

Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”

in the encouragement of the Holy Spirit

Quote: τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Luke is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as the one who was giving the church encouragement. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them”

Acts 9:32

Now it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

throughout all

Quote: διὰ πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria”

came down

Quote: κατελθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel”

the saints inhabiting Lydda

Quote: τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel”

Lydda

Quote: Λύδδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Lydda is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers.

Acts 9:33

there he found a certain man

Quote: εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα (1)

The word found does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”

a certain man, Aeneas by name

Quote: ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this sentence to introduce Aeneas as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Aeneas

Quote: Αἰνέαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Aeneas is the name of a man.

lying on a mat for eight years, who was paralyzed

Quote: ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture.

lying on a mat for eight years, who was paralyzed

Quote: ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

The reason why Aeneas had been lying in a bed for eight years was that he was paralyzed. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years”

Acts 9:34

Arise

Quote: ἀνάστηθι (1)

Arise in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.

Arise and make your bed for yourself

Quote: ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Peter says for yourself to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you could make your own bed now”

make your bed for yourself

Quote: στρῶσον σεαυτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you”

Acts 9:35

all the ones living in Lydda and in Sharon saw him, who turned to the Lord

Quote: εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Aeneas. The pronoun who refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord”

all the ones living in Lydda and in Sharon

Quote: πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon”

and in Sharon

Quote: καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Sharon is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon”

saw him

Quote: εἶδαν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around”

who turned to the Lord

Quote: οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, turned to the Lord means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus”

Acts 9:36

Now

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

Tabitha … which, being translated, is said “Dorcas

Quote: Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Tabitha was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and Dorcas was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas”

is said

Quote: λέγεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means”

full of good works

Quote: πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke speaks of Dorcas as if she were a container that was full of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously”

Acts 9:37

in those days

Quote: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase in those days refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby”

having washed her, they laid her

Quote: λούσαντες & αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it”

they laid her in an upper room

Quote: ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects”

an upper room

Quote: ὑπερῴῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large, sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation.

Acts 9:38

having heard that Peter was in it, sent

Quote: ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent”

urging him

Quote: παρακαλοῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, urging would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural.

Acts 9:39

arising, Peter went with them

Quote: ἀναστὰς & Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the word arising means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them”

them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

This first instance of them in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of them would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows.

all the widows

Quote: πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows”

coats and garments, as many as Dorcas used to make, being with them

Quote: χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these coats and garments to help these widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes”

being with them

Quote: μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive”

Acts 9:40

having put down {his} knees

Quote: θεὶς τὰ γόνατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently”

Tabitha, arise

Quote: Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah restores you to life, so you can get up now”

Tabitha, arise

Quote: Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life”

Acts 9:41

giving her {his} hand, he raised her up

Quote: δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Peter extended his hand to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand”

the saints and the widows

Quote: τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

These saints and widows were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers”

the saints

Quote: τοὺς ἁγίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term saints by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in 9:33. Alternate translation: “the other believers”

Acts 9:42

And it became known throughout all Joppa

Quote: γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter”

Acts 9:43

Now it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

a tanner

Quote: βυρσεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A tanner is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize.

Acts 10

Acts 10 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• Verses 1–2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: Background Information)

• In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles.

• In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together.

• The long sentence in verses 36–38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Jews visiting with Gentiles

The Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: clean, wash and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Baptism and the Holy Spirit

Those who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.

Acts 10:1

Now a certain man

Quote: ἀνὴρ δέ τις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

Cornelius

Quote: Κορνήλιος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Cornelius is the name of a man.

a centurion

Quote: ἑκατοντάρχης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A centurion was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers”

the regiment called Italian

Quote: Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment”

the regiment

Quote: Σπείρης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A regiment was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your language that you can use for a unit of about this size.

Italian

Quote: Ἰταλικῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Italian is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea.

Acts 10:2

devout and fearing God

Quote: εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The word devout and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility.

devout and fearing God

Quote: εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel”

to the people

Quote: τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that the people refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need”

through all

Quote: διὰ παντός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in 2:25. Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times”

praying to God through all

Quote: δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The phrase through all, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often”

Acts 10:3

the ninth hour

Quote: ὥραν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time”

the ninth hour

Quote: ὥραν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time.

the ninth hour

Quote: ὥραν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine”

Acts 10:4

But he, staring at him

Quote: ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun him stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel”

What is it, lord

Quote: τί ἐστιν, κύριε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Cornelius uses the respectful title lord because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in 9:5.

And he said to him

Quote: εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he stands for the angel, and the pronoun him stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius”

Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God

Quote: αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

A memorial offering was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them”

before God

Quote: ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, before means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God”

Acts 10:5

who is called Peter

Quote: ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter”

Acts 10:6

is being hosted by

Quote: ξενίζεται παρά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of”

a tanner

Quote: βυρσεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the term tanner in 9:43.

Acts 10:7

And when the angel speaking to him left

Quote: ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ (1)

Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”

devout

Quote: εὐσεβῆ (1)

The adjective devout describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”

Acts 10:8

everything

Quote: ἅπαντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

By everything, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said”

Acts 10:9

as those were traveling

Quote: ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun those refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling”

at about the sixth hour

Quote: περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon”

at about the sixth hour

Quote: περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six”

Acts 10:10

a vision came upon him

Quote: ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke speaks of this vision as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision”

Acts 10:11

he sees the sky opened

Quote: θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”

the sky opened

Quote: τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form opened, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open”

being let down

Quote: καθιέμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down”

Acts 10:12

all the

Quote: πάντα τὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word all is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various”

and birds of the sky

Quote: καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

From Peter’s response in 10:14, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat”

Acts 10:13

a voice came to him

Quote: ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice”

arising

Quote: ἀναστάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead”

Acts 10:14

Not at all

Quote: μηδαμῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never”

I have never eaten anything common and unclean

Quote: οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word never and the negative terms common and unclean. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean”

common and unclean

Quote: κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat”

I have never eaten anything common and unclean

Quote: οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals”

Acts 10:15

the voice {came} to him again

Quote: φωνὴ πάλιν & πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

The implied verb here is came, and so Luke is speaking once again of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again”

What God has cleansed

Quote: ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed”

you, do not make common

Quote: σὺ μὴ κοίνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The voice is adding the pronoun you for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common”

Acts 10:16

this happened three times

Quote: τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does.

the container was … taken back up

Quote: ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up”

Acts 10:17

Peter was doubting within himself what the vision that he had seen might mean

Quote: ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν (1)

Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”

behold, the men

Quote: ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men”

sent by Cornelius

Quote: οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent”

the … stood before … gate

Quote: ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a gate in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house”

Acts 10:18

called Peter

Quote: ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter”

was being hosted

Quote: ξενίζεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest”

Acts 10:19

Behold, three men

Quote: ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The Spirit is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men”

three men

Quote: ἄνδρες τρεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST.

Acts 10:20

arising

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead”

go down

Quote: κατάβηθι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Peter is to go down from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house”

go with them

Quote: πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles”

not hesitating

Quote: μηδὲν διακρινόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with”

Acts 10:22

they said, “Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon you to his house and to hear words from you

Quote: οἱ & εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him”

they said

Quote: οἱ & εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied”

they said

Quote: οἱ & εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said”

fearing God

Quote: φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The word righteous and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility.

a man righteous and fearing God

Quote: ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in 10:2. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel”

and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel

Quote: μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel”

the whole nation of the Jews

Quote: ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says whole as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people”

words

Quote: ῥήματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The messengers are using the term words to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message”

Acts 10:23

Therefore, having invited them, he hosted them

Quote: εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight”

arising

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the word arising means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey”

some of the brothers

Quote: τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers”

Acts 10:24

on the next day

Quote: τῇ & ἐπαύριον (1)

The next day means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”

Acts 10:25

and} falling down at {his} feet

Quote: πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Cornelius did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him”

Acts 10:26

Arise! I too am a man myself

Quote: ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are”

Acts 10:27

talking with him, he went in

Quote: συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun he refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in”

finds

Quote: εὑρίσκει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found” (See also: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

many gathered together

Quote: συνεληλυθότας πολλούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together”

Acts 10:28

how unlawful it is for a Jewish man

Quote: ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man”

with a foreigner

Quote: ἀλλοφύλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the term foreigner refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile”

man

Quote: ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term man is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person”

common or unclean

Quote: κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God”

Acts 10:29

having been summoned

Quote: μεταπεμφθείς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me”

did you summon

Quote: μετεπέμψασθέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

The word you is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 10:30

Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house

Quote: ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT.

Four days ago

Quote: ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or Four days ago. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago”

this hour

Quote: ταύτης τῆς ὥρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Cornelius is using the term hour to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time”

at the ninth {hour

Quote: τὴν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Cornelius is using the adjective ninth as a noun. ULT adds hour to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in 10:3.

at the ninth {hour

Quote: τὴν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in 10:3.

at the ninth {hour

Quote: τὴν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine”

at the ninth {hour

Quote: τὴν ἐνάτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time”

behold, a man

Quote: ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Cornelius is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this man appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man”

a man

Quote: ἀνὴρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke says in 10:3 that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him a man here because the angel appeared to him in human form. you could state that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form”

Acts 10:31

he says, ‘Cornelius, your prayer has been heard, and your alms have been remembered before God

Quote: φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God”

he says

Quote: φησί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”

your prayer has been heard, and your alms have been remembered before God

Quote: εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms”

have been remembered before God

Quote: ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word remembered does not imply that God had forgotten about these alms. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:4. Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them”

before

Quote: ἐνώπιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the word before is being used. Alternate translation: “in the presence of”

Acts 10:32

Therefore, send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter. He is being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea

Quote: πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea”

who is called Peter

Quote: ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter”

He is being hosted

Quote: οὗτος ξενίζεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest”

summon Simon … by the sea

Quote: μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα & παρὰ θάλασσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT.

Acts 10:33

you, … you … you

Quote: σέ & σύ & σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

The word you is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction.

and you did well {in} coming

Quote: σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming”

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Cornelius is using the word we to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

before God

Quote: ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Cornelius is using the word before. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God”

the things you have been instructed by the Lord {to say

Quote: τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say”

the things you have been instructed by the Lord {to say

Quote: τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT.

Acts 10:34

opening {his} mouth, Peter said

Quote: ἀνοίξας & Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression opening his mouth … said contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied”

a favoritism-shower

Quote: προσωπολήμπτης (1)

Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”

God is not a favoritism-shower

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations”

Acts 10:35

the one fearing him and working righteousness

Quote: ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην (1)

Here, fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”

the one fearing him and working righteousness

Quote: ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right”

Acts 10:36

The word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this word; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state “You know the word” in this verse as well.

The word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the term word to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message”

to the sons of Israel

Quote: τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel”

proclaiming peace through Jesus Christ

Quote: εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God”

of all

Quote: πάντων (1)

The word all could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”

Acts 10:37

you know the word

Quote: ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ & ῥῆμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the term word to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things”

throughout all Judea

Quote: καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea”

after the baptism that John announced

Quote: μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης (1)

Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them”

Acts 10:38

Jesus, the one from Nazareth, how God anointed him

Quote: Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,”

Jesus, the one from Nazareth, how God anointed him

Quote: Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,”

God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power

Quote: ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter speaks of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit”

doing good

Quote: εὐεργετῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people”

all the ones being oppressed by the devil

Quote: πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil”

God was with him

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression was with him is an idiom. See how you translated it in 7:9. Alternate translation: “God was helping him”

Acts 10:39

we {are} witnesses

Quote: ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, we refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction.

whom they also killed

Quote: ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun whom refers to Jesus, and the pronoun they refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who conspired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him”

hanging him on a tree

Quote: κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says tree to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him”

Acts 10:40

this one

Quote: τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus”

God raised this one up

Quote: τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, raised … up is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again”

on the third day

Quote: τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died”

caused him to be seen

Quote: ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him”

Acts 10:41

not by all the people, but by witnesses chosen beforehand by God—by us who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead

Quote: οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you could adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him”

by all the people

Quote: παντὶ τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people”

chosen beforehand by God

Quote: τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand”

who ate and drank with him

Quote: οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Peter is using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died”

Acts 10:42

us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, us refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction.

to the people

Quote: τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Connecting Statement:

By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people”

the one chosen by God

Quote: ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen”

of the living and the dead

Quote: ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Peter is using the adjectives living and dead as nouns. (The word living is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died”

Acts 10:43

To this one

Quote: τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus”

through his name

Quote: διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is speaking of the name of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority”

Acts 10:44

the Holy Spirit fell on all the ones listening to {his} word

Quote: ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:16. Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit”

all the ones listening to

Quote: πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also listening to his message, the word all refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening”

his} word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message”

Acts 10:45

the faithful

Quote: οἱ & πιστοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective faithful as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men”

from the circumcision

Quote: ἐκ περιτομῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term circumcision by association to identify these faithful people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish”

the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out

Quote: ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit”

was poured out

Quote: ἐκκέχυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given”

the gift of the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Luke is using a possessive form to identify the Holy Spirit as a gift from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift”

also on the Gentiles

Quote: καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, also refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers”

Acts 10:46

speaking in languages

Quote: λαλούντων γλώσσαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that at least some of these languages were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned”

Acts 10:47

No one is able to withhold water, is he, so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also {did

Quote: μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding is he. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did”

No one is able to withhold water, is he, so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also {did

Quote: μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!”

No one is able to withhold water, is he, so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also {did

Quote: μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb withhold and the negative particle not. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!”

water

Quote: τὸ ὕδωρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Peter is using water, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission”

so that these are not baptized

Quote: τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism”

Acts 10:48

he commanded them to be baptized

Quote: προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them”

he commanded them to be baptized

Quote: προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism”

to be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, in the name is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in 10:43. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:48. Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah”

Acts 11

Acts 11 General Notes

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“The Gentiles also had received the word of God”

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

“the Lord”

In verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: Politeness)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius

In Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47.

Acts 11:1

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers”

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Peter, by using words, shared with Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

Acts 11:2

came up to Jerusalem

Quote: ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Peter came up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem”

those from the circumcision

Quote: οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

As in 10:45, Luke is using the term circumcision by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely to have been strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews”

Acts 11:3

saying that he went in to men having foreskins and ate with them

Quote: λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’”

he went in to

Quote: εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these men. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of”

men having foreskins

Quote: ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The phrase men having foreskins refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles”

Acts 11:4

Peter, beginning, was explaining to them

Quote: ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Luke is using the word beginning to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them”

Acts 11:5

being let down

Quote: καθιεμένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down”

Acts 11:6

and the birds of the sky

Quote: καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

From Peter’s response in 11:8, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in 10:12. Alternate translation: “ … and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat”

Acts 11:7

a voice saying to me

Quote: φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Peter speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me”

arising

Quote: ἀναστάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead”

saying to me, ‘Peter, arising, kill and eat

Quote: λεγούσης μοι, ἀναστάς, Πέτρε, θῦσον καὶ φάγε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling me to arise and kill and eat”

Acts 11:8

But I said, ‘By no means, Lord; for the common or unclean has never entered into my mouth

Quote: εἶπον δέ, μηδαμῶς, Κύριε, ὅτι κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I told the Lord that I would certainly not do that, since the common or unclean had never entered my mouth”

By no means

Quote: μηδαμῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

By no means is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. See how you translated this in 10:14. Alternate translation: “No, never”

the common or unclean

Quote: κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “food that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat”

the common or unclean has never entered into my mouth

Quote: κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the common or unclean, like some of those animals, has never entered into my mouth”

the common or unclean has never entered into my mouth

Quote: κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the word never and the negative terms common and unclean. Alternate translation: “only what is holy and clean has ever entered into my mouth”

the common or unclean has never entered into my mouth

Quote: κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Peter is using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean”

Acts 11:9

from heaven, ‘What God has cleansed, you, do not make common

Quote: ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “from heaven and told me that I must not make common what God had cleansed”

What God has cleansed

Quote: ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed”

you, do not make common

Quote: σὺ μὴ κοίνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The voice is adding the pronoun you for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common”

Acts 11:10

this happened three times

Quote: τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in 10:16.

everything was pulled up

Quote: ἀνεσπάσθη & ἅπαντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up”

Acts 11:11

we were

Quote: ἦμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The term we refers to Peter and the others in the house in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction.

behold, immediately

Quote: ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on how soon after his vision ended these three men arrived. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “right then”

immediately

Quote: ἐξαυτῆς (1)

Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”

having been sent

Quote: ἀπεσταλμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Someone had sent them”

Acts 11:12

not hesitating

Quote: μηδὲν διακρίναντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” See how you translated this in 10:20.

these six brothers

Quote: οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers”

the house of the man

Quote: τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter implicitly means the house of Cornelius. Alternate translation: “the house of the man who had sent the messengers to me”

Acts 11:13

to us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The term us refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction.

Simon, called Peter

Quote: Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in 10:32. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter”

Acts 11:14

words

Quote: ῥήματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The angel is using the term words to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message”

you … you will be saved—you … your

Quote: σὲ & σωθήσῃ σὺ & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

All the instances of the words you and your in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

you will be saved

Quote: σωθήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you”

all your house

Quote: πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, house refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house”

Acts 11:15

as I began to speak

Quote: ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Peter is using the word began to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking”

the Holy Spirit fell on them, just as also on us in the beginning

Quote: ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it fell on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in 8:16 and 10:44. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning”

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house”

just as also on us

Quote: ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here the word us refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

in the beginning

Quote: ἐν ἀρχῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By in the beginning, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost”

Acts 11:16

the word

Quote: τοῦ ῥήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the term word to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus”

you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit

Quote: ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to Chapter 1, and see how you translated this in 1:5. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you”

you will be baptized

Quote: ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you”

Acts 11:17

to us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here the word us refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

God gave to them the same gift as also to us having believed

Quote: τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter is referring to the gift of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the gift of the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us when we believed”

I, who was I {to be} able to hinder God

Quote: ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter is using the question form to convince his listeners that God wanted him to accept the Gentile believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I could not hinder God!”

I, who was I {to be} able to hinder God

Quote: ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

For emphasis, Peter is adding the pronoun I, which is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with verbs but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly could not hinder God!”

to hinder God

Quote: κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to indicate in what way Peter thought he might be able to hinder God. Alternate translation: “to hinder God by refusing to welcome and baptize people to whom he had given his own Spirit”

Acts 11:18

they became quiet

Quote: ἡσύχασαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter was speaking. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers became quiet”

they became quiet

Quote: ἡσύχασαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiom that means they no longer argued. Alternate translation: “they no longer argued with Peter”

to the Gentiles also God has given repentance unto life

Quote: καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of repentance and life, you could express the same idea in other ways. Here the term life refers to everlasting life. Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles as well to repent and live forever”

Acts 11:19

Then

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke uses the word translated Then to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

the ones having been scattered from

Quote: οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the persecution that Luke describes in 8:1, which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of”

Phoenicia

Quote: Φοινίκης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Phoenicia is the name of a region.

Cyprus

Quote: Κύπρου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in 4:36.

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

speaking the word to no one except only to Jews

Quote: μηδενὶ λαλοῦντες τὸν λόγον εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

Since Luke says here that the scattered believers spoke about Jesus only to Jews, but he says in the next verse that some of them spoke to “Greeks” (that is, Gentiles), it might appear in your language that Luke was contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Most of them believed they should speak the message about Jesus only to Jews, so that is what they did”

Acts 11:20

men, Cypriots and Cyrenians

Quote: ἄνδρες, Κύπριοι καὶ Κυρηναῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is describing these men in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “Cypriot and Cyrenian men”

Cypriots

Quote: Κύπριοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cypriots is the name for people who come from the island of Cyprus.

Cyrenians

Quote: Κυρηναῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cyrenians is the name for people who come from the city of Cyrene.

the Greeks

Quote: τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls Greeks were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek”

Acts 11:21

the hand of the Lord

Quote: χεὶρ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says the Lord. In 4:29–30, the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord”

the hand

Quote: χεὶρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the hand represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power”

was with them

Quote: ἦν & μετ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

When Luke says that God was with the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them”

turned to the Lord

Quote: ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke speaks of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically turned to the Lord. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus”

to the Lord

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus”

Acts 11:22

the report about them came to the ears of the church that was in Jerusalem

Quote: ἠκούσθη & ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

In your language, the expression was heard in the ears might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem”

And the report about them came to the ears of the church that was in Jerusalem

Quote: ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “The church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them”

the report

Quote: ὁ λόγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report”

them … they sent out

Quote: αὐτῶν & ἐξαπέστειλαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun they refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders sent”

Acts 11:23

the grace of God

Quote: τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them”

with purpose of heart

Quote: τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the heart represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination”

Acts 11:24

For

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because”

full of the Holy Spirit and of faith

Quote: πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke speaks of Barnabas as if he were a container that was full of the Holy Spirit and of faith. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith”

and full of the Holy Spirit and of faith

Quote: καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who believed firmly in Jesus”

a considerable crowd was added

Quote: προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd”

to the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke says the Lord (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus”

Acts 11:25

he went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out”

Acts 11:26

having found him, he brought him

Quote: εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him”

And it happened to them that for even a whole year they were gathered together with the church

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ (1)

This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year”

to them … they were gathered together with the church

Quote: αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church”

the disciples were first called

Quote: χρηματίσαι & πρώτως & τοὺς μαθητὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people first called the disciples”

Christians

Quote: Χριστιανούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Christians is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah.

first … in Antioch

Quote: πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ (1)

Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”

Acts 11:27

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

in these days

Quote: ἐν ταύταις & ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the word days to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time”

came down

Quote: κατῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that these prophets came down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled”

Acts 11:28

having arisen

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Here, having arisen means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say”

over the whole world

Quote: ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The term whole is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world”

the … world

Quote: τὴν οἰκουμένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that by world, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire”

upon Claudius

Quote: ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression upon Claudius refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius”

Claudius

Quote: Κλαυδίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Claudius is the name of a man.

Acts 11:29

they determined, just as any of the disciples was prospering, each of them to send {something

Quote: τῶν & μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν & πέμψαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that while some of the disciples were prospering greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford”

to the brothers

Quote: τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers”

Acts 11:30

to the elders

Quote: πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the elders who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem”

by the hand of Barnabas and Saul

Quote: διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here, the hand, one part of a person, represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take it to them”

by the hand of Barnabas and Saul

Quote: διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If you retain the figurative word hand in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul”

Acts 12

Acts 12 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25–30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod.

Acts 12:1

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

at that time

Quote: κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase that time implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,”

laid on hands to harm some from the church

Quote: ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The expression laid on hands means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. See how you translated it in 5:18. Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them”

laid on hands to harm some from the church

Quote: ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest some from the church. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them”

Acts 12:2

he killed James

Quote: ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It was probably not Herod himself who killed James. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to execute James”

Acts 12:3

to the Jews

Quote: τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews”

the days of Unleavened Bread

Quote: ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The phrase Unleavened Bread is the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several days. If your readers would not be familiar with the food known as “bread” or the substance known as “leaven,” you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “the days of Special Food”

Acts 12:4

and whom, having arrested, he put in prison

Quote: ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns whom refers to Peter, and the pronoun he refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison”

to four quaternions of soldiers

Quote: τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These quaternions were groups of four soldiers each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers”

intending to bring him out to the people

Quote: βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase to bring him out means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people”

Acts 12:5

Peter was being kept

Quote: ὁ & Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter”

prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church

Quote: προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him”

Acts 12:6

to bring him out

Quote: προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated to bring him out is slightly different from the word translated that same way in 12:4. It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him”

bound with two chains

Quote: δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him”

Acts 12:7

behold, an angel

Quote: ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this angel appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel”

Acts 12:9

he did not know that what was being done by the angel was real, but he was thinking

Quote: οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; ἐδόκει δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’ He was thinking”

what was being done by the angel

Quote: τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the angel was doing”

he was thinking he was seeing a vision

Quote: ἐδόκει & ὅραμα βλέπειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’”

Acts 12:10

having passed by the first guard and the second

Quote: διελθόντες & πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed”

and the second

Quote: καὶ δευτέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The word guard can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard”

Acts 12:11

Peter, having come to himself, said

Quote: ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase having come to himself means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said”

the hand

Quote: χειρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hand represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power”

all the expectation of the Jewish people

Quote: πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of expectation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me”

of the Jewish people

Quote: τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is likely using the phrase the Jewish people to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people”

Acts 12:12

called Mark

Quote: τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Mark”

many

Quote: ἱκανοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many people”

Acts 12:13

when he knocked at

Quote: κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

To “knock” at a door means to tap or hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.”

the door of the gate

Quote: τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word gate probably describes an entrance from the street to a courtyard in front of the house. If houses in your culture have a similar entrance, in your translation you could use the name for it in your language. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard”

Rhoda

Quote: Ῥόδη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Rhoda is the name of a woman.

Acts 12:14

from joy

Quote: ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful,”

Acts 12:15

they said

Quote: οἱ & εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said”

It is his angel

Quote: ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Some Jews believed in guardian angels, and the people inside thehouse may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you saw was Peter’s guardian angel”

Acts 12:16

and opening, they saw him

Quote: ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

While the word they refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him”

Acts 12:17

to James

Quote: Ἰακώβῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by James, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text.

the brothers

Quote: τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers”

Acts 12:18

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development.

no small disturbance

Quote: τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance”

among the soldiers, what then had Peter become

Quote: ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’”

what then had Peter become

Quote: τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο (1)

The word translated become can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone”

Acts 12:19

for him

Quote: αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “Peter”

having searched for him

Quote: ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It was probably not Herod himself who searched for Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him”

having gone down

Quote: κατελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke speaks of Herod having gone down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled”

Acts 12:20

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

he was quarreling

Quote: ἦν & θυμομαχῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling”

with the Tyrians … Sidonians

Quote: Τυρίοις & Σιδωνίοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Tyrians is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and Sidonians is the name for people from the city of Sidon.

they came to him unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously”

they came to him unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously”

they came to him unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν (1)

The word unanimously indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in 1:14. Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”

Blastus

Quote: Βλάστον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Blastus is the name of a man.

the one over the bedchamber of the king

Quote: τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This phrase indicates that Blastus was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain”

they were requesting peace

Quote: ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations”

their country was nourished from the king’s country

Quote: τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply”

their country was nourished from the king’s country

Quote: τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Herod had stopped supplying food to the people of Tyre and Sidon because he was angry with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply, and Herod had cut off that supply because he was angry with them”

Acts 12:21

on the appointed day

Quote: τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that this was the day on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them”

having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne

Quote: ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Putting on this royal clothing, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the throne were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was”

having sat on the throne

Quote: καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος (1)

The throne was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.

Acts 12:22

The voice of a god and not of a man

Quote: Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The people are using one part of Herod, his voice, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man”

Acts 12:23

because he did not give the glory to God

Quote: ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does.

having become worm-eaten, he died

Quote: γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The word translated worm-eaten is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word worm-eaten expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this.

having become worm-eaten, he died

Quote: γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel struck Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word struck is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died”

Acts 12:24

the word of God was increasing and was being multiplied

Quote: ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with and. The verb being multiplied tells in what way the word of God was increasing, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly”

the word of God was increasing and was being multiplied

Quote: ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were increasing and being multiplied. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God”

the word of God

Quote: ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

was being multiplied

Quote: ἐπληθύνετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it”

Acts 12:25

Then

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word translated Then to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story.

Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem,having completed their service

Quote: Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they returned to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem”

Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem

Quote: Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading to is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST.

having completed their service

Quote: πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in 11:29–30. Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected”

John, called Mark

Quote: Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in 12:12. Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark”

Acts 13

Acts 13 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Verses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus. Verses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus. Verses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: Metaphor and righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

“the Lord”

In verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: Politeness)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia

In verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term our to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 13:1

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

Simeon called Niger

Quote: Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Simeon is the name of a man. The word Niger is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African”

Simeon called Niger

Quote: Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger”

Manaen

Quote: Μαναήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Manaen is the name of a man.

Lucius the Cyrenian

Quote: Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Lucius is the name of a man. The word Cyrenian is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in 11:20.

the foster brother

Quote: σύντροφος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the foster brother of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend”

of Herod the tetrarch

Quote: Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In the Roman Empire, a tetrarch was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. Herod the tetrarch ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in Chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod”

Acts 13:2

while they were ministering to the Lord

Quote: λειτουργούντων & αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression ministering to means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord”

to the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus”

Separate

Quote: ἀφορίσατε (1)

Alternate translation: “Set apart”

for the work to which I have called them

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the work of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in Chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here.

Acts 13:3

having fasted and prayed, and having laid {their} hands on them, they released them

Quote: νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns their and they refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun them refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase having fasted and prayed refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them”

having laid {their} hands on them

Quote: ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul as a symbolic action to show that they were sending them on their mission with the blessing and support of the whole church and that they were entrusting them to God’s care. Alternate translation: “placed their hands on them as a sign of blessing and support and as a way of entrusting them to God’s care”

they released them

Quote: ἀπέλυσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

While in this context the term released basically means “sent off,” the implication is that the believers in Antioch were freeing Barnabas and Saul of all of their responsibilities in the church so that they could go on the mission on which the Holy Spirit was sending them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gave them the freedom to go on their new mission”

Acts 13:4

they, having been sent out

Quote: αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul”

having been sent out by the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had sent them out”

went down

Quote: κατῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Barnabas and Saul went down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled”

Seleucia

Quote: Σελεύκιαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Seleucia is the name of a city that is on the seacoast.

Acts 13:5

Salamis

Quote: Σαλαμῖνι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Salamis is the name of a city on the island of Cyprus.

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God”

Acts 13:6

Paphos

Quote: Πάφου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Paphos is the name of a major city on the island of Cyprus. It was where the Roman proconsul lived.

they found

Quote: εὗρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word found does not mean that Barnabas, Saul, and Mark were intentionally searching for a certain man. They happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “they happened to meet”

a certain man, a magician

Quote: ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word magician here does not mean someone who entertains others with tricks based on slight of hand and optical illusions. It means someone who practices witchcraft or supernatural magic arts. Your language and culture may have a term for such a person that you can use in your translation.

whose name {was} Bar Jesus

Quote: ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Bar Jesus are a name that means “Son of Jesus.” However, there was no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time.

Acts 13:7

the proconsul

Quote: τῷ ἀνθυπάτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the governor”

Sergius Paulus

Quote: Σεργίῳ Παύλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Sergius and Paulus are the names of a man.

an intelligent man

Quote: ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke provides this background information about Sergius Paulus to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

Acts 13:8

Elymas, “the Magician

Quote: Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Elymas is an Arabic word that Bar-Jesus was using as another name. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, the Magician. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning.

for thus is his name translated

Quote: οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for that is how one translates his name”

seeking to turn the proconsul away from the faith

Quote: ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, to turn someone away from something is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message”

Acts 13:9

being filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit”

being filled with the Holy Spirit

Quote: πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit was inspiring”

Acts 13:10

O full of all deceit and all trickery

Quote: ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective full as a noun to identify Elymas as a person who is full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery”

O full of all deceit and all trickery

Quote: ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of deceit and trickery, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “O you who are always deceiving and tricking other people”

O full of all deceit and all trickery

Quote: ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were a container that was full of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery”

of all deceit and all trickery

Quote: παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms deceit and wickedness mean similar things. Paul may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “of all evil treachery”

of all deceit and all trickery

Quote: παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all in these two instances as a generalization for emphasis. (But when he calls Elymas the enemy of all righteousness, that may be understood more literally.) Alternate translation: “of great deceit and great trickery”

son of the devil

Quote: υἱὲ διαβόλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression son of describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil”

son of the devil

Quote: υἱὲ διαβόλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul is drawing an implicit contrast between Elymas’ claim to be the “son of Jesus” (Bar Jesus) and his actual character as a son of the devil. If you retain the “son of” idiom in your translation, you could bring out this contrast explicitly. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are not the son of Jesus—you are the son of the devil!”

enemy of all righteousness

Quote: ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Paul is speaking of righteousness as if it were a person who could have an enemy. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness”

enemy of all righteousness

Quote: ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enemy of everything that is right” or “opposed to everything that is right”

will you not stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord

Quote: οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul is using the question form to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord!”

turning aside the straight paths of the Lord

Quote: διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting paths that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went straight. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right”

Acts 13:11

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term behold to focus Elymas’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

the hand of the Lord {is} upon you

Quote: χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the word hand represents the power of God, and the phrase upon you indicates punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord is going to punish you”

blind, not seeing the sun

Quote: τυφλὸς, μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Paul is using a word and a phrase together to express a single idea. The phrase not seeing the sun tells to what degree Elymas will be blind. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “so blind that you will not be able to tell whether it is day or night”

a mist and darkness fell upon him

Quote: ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking of this mist and darkness as if they were going to fall on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility.

a mist and darkness fell upon him

Quote: ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Luke may be using the two words mist and darkness together to express a single idea. The word mist may tell what kind of darkness was all that Elymas could see. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “a misty darkness was all that Elymas could see”

Acts 13:12

the proconsul

Quote: ὁ ἀνθύπατος (1)

A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “the governor”

being astonished at the teaching of the Lord

Quote: ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him”

the teaching of the Lord

Quote: τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the word teaching to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord”

the teaching of the Lord

Quote: τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

In this possessive form, the Lord is the object rather than the subject of teaching. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” you could state that as an alternate translation.

Acts 13:13

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

the ones around Paul

Quote: οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

The phrase those around Paul refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to the rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in 13:46, 13:50, etc. The order of names is important.

the ones around Paul

Quote: οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον (1)

Alternate translation: “Paul and his traveling companions”

Perga of Pamphylia

Quote: Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Perga is the name of a city, and the word Pamphylia is the name of the province in which that city was located.

Acts 13:14

they

Quote: αὐτοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas”

they sat down

Quote: ἐκάθισαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Paul and Barnabas may have sat down in the place where rabbis would sit, or in the way that rabbis would sit, as a way of asking permission to speak to the congregation. The fact that they were invited to speak (13:15) suggests that this is the case. Alternate translation: “sat down as rabbis would, to ask permission to speak to the congregation”

Acts 13:15

of the Law and the Prophets

Quote: τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Law is the name for one part of the Hebrew Scriptures, and the word Prophets is the name for another part of the Hebrew Scriptures. Even though these are common nouns, Luke is using them to mean specific things. Show this in your translation in the way that is natural in your language.

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” or “You brothers of ours”

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The synagogue leaders are using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers”

if any word of exhortation for the people is in you

Quote: εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The synagogue leaders are using the term word to mean what Barnabas or Paul would want to say using words. Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people”

speak

Quote: λέγετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates an invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an invitation. Alternate translation: “we invite you to speak it now”

Acts 13:16

arising

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Here the term arising means that Paul stood up to show that he indeed wanted to speak, as he had been invited to do. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:14. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he wanted to speak”

motioning with {his} hand

Quote: κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He wanted everyone in the synagogue to hear what he had to say from the very first word, so he did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak”

Men, Israelites and ones fearing God

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται, καὶ οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Israelites and you who fear God”

ones fearing God

Quote: οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. That is what Paul means here. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:2. Alternate translation: “you Gentiles who sincerely worship the God of Israel”

listen

Quote: ἀκούσατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen to what I am about to say”

Acts 13:17

The God of this people Israel

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ (1)

Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”

our

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form of the word our here and in verses 32 and 33.

fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors”

exalted the people

Quote: τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

When Paul says that God exalted the people of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population”

with an uplifted arm

Quote: μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, an uplifted arm describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power”

Acts 13:18

he endured them

Quote: ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. Paul would be quoting Deuteronomy 1:13 from a well-known Greek translation. If the reading put up with them is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in 13:40–41. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them”

Acts 13:19

he gave them their land for an inheritance

Quote: κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to God, the pronoun them refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun their refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied”

Acts 13:20

in about 450 years

Quote: ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years”

he gave them judges until Samuel the prophet

Quote: ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet”

Acts 13:21

for 40 years

Quote: ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years”

Acts 13:22

he raised up David for them for {their} king

Quote: ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the expression raised up describes God giving someone an important position. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “made David their king”

he said, testifying, ‘I have found David, {son} of Jesse, a man according to my heart, who will do all my will

Quote: εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel 13:14 and Psalm 89:20.) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will”

I have found

Quote: εὗρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word found does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart”

a man according to my heart

Quote: ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me”

Acts 13:23

From the seed of this one

Quote: τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.”

the seed

Quote: τοῦ σπέρματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The term seed means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants”

of this one

Quote: τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David”

to Israel

Quote: τῷ Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, Israel refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel”

Acts 13:24

John

Quote: Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By John, Paul is referring implicitly to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist”

before the face of his entrance

Quote: πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

In your language, the expression before the face of his entrance, meaning “before the appearance of his entry into ministry” (See: next two notes), might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “before he appeared” or “before he entered into his ministry”

before the face of his entrance

Quote: πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the term face means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance”

of his entrance

Quote: τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

By entrance, Paul is referring to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry”

of his entrance

Quote: τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun his refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’ entrance”

a baptism of repentance to all the people of Israel

Quote: βάπτισμα μετανοίας παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to all the people of Israel a baptism that people received to show that they were repenting”

Acts 13:25

his} course

Quote: τὸν δρόμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking of John as if he had been running a race or course. Alternate translation: “his work”

he was saying, ‘Who do you think me to be? I am not he. But behold, one is coming after me, of whom the sandals of {his} feet I am not worthy to untie

Quote: ἔλεγεν, τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it might be good to present this quotation from John the Baptist as a direct quotation if possible, since it uses several figures of speech that might not sound natural in an indirect quotation. (As an indirect quotation, this would read something like this: “he asked the people who they thought him to be, and he told them he was not he and that behold, one was coming after him, the sandals of whose feet he was not worthy to untie.”) You may be able to indicate the beginning of Paul’s quotation from John with some punctuation or convention that your language uses.

Who do you think me to be

Quote: τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

John is using the question form to challenge his listeners’ idea of who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not who you think I am!”

I am not he

Quote: οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to the Messiah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah”

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

John is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

of whom the sandals of {his} feet I am not worthy to untie

Quote: οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service”

the sandals of {his} feet

Quote: τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

In your language, the expression the sandals of his feet might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals”

Acts 13:26

Men, brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and the ones among you fearing God

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God”

brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and the ones among you fearing God

Quote: ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers”

sons

Quote: υἱοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term sons to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants”

to us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here the word us includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction.

the word of this salvation has been sent

Quote: ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent the word about this salvation”

the word

Quote: ὁ λόγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term word to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message”

of this salvation

Quote: τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God is saving people”

Acts 13:27

not recognizing this one

Quote: τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus”

not recognizing this one

Quote: τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah”

the voices of the prophets

Quote: τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the word voices to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets”

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads”

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of the prophets on each Sabbath in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue”

Acts 13:28

they asked Pilate for him to be killed

Quote: ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the word they refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed”

for him to be killed

Quote: ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to execute him”

Acts 13:29

all the things having been written about him

Quote: πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets had written about him”

taking him down from the tree

Quote: καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to say explicitly that Jesus had died before this happened. Alternate translation: “taking him down from the tree after he died”

the tree

Quote: τοῦ ξύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word translated tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Paul is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “from the cross”

Acts 13:30

But God raised him

Quote: ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Paul uses the word But to indicate a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless”

raised him

Quote: ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again after he had died”

raised him from the dead

Quote: ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead”

Acts 13:31

who was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem

Quote: ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun who refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem”

who was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem

Quote: ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days”

many days

Quote: ἡμέρας πλείους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

We know from the Gospels that this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.

by the ones having come up

Quote: τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Paul says having come up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “by the ones who traveled”

Acts 13:32

the promise having been to {our} fathers

Quote: τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a promise that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers”

our} fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

Acts 13:33

that God has completely fulfilled this for our children

Quote: ὅτι ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. you could state something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.”

this

Quote: ταύτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by this he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise”

for our children

Quote: τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading for our children is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST.

for our children

Quote: τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term children to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants”

raising up Jesus

Quote: ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, raising up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “causing Jesus to live again after he had died”

As it is also written in the second Psalm

Quote: ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm”

the second Psalm

Quote: τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2”

You are my Son; today I have fathered you

Quote: Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Psalm 2 as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

You are my Son; today I have fathered you

Quote: Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “You are my Son, yes, today I have fathered you”

Son; … have fathered you

Quote: Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation.

Acts 13:34

he raised him up … he has spoken

Quote: ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν & εἴρηκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to God, and the pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus … God has spoken”

he raised him up

Quote: ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “he brought him back to life”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead”

I will give you the holy, trustworthy things of David

Quote: δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and ultimately the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

the holy, trustworthy things of David

Quote: τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjectives holy and trustworthy as nouns. ULT adds the word things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the trustworthy promises that God made to David as the ancestor of the Holy One”

Acts 13:35

in another {place

Quote: ἐν ἑτέρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by another place, he means another place in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in another place in the Scriptures”

he also says

Quote: καὶ & λέγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun he refers to God, as in 13:34. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says”

your Holy One

Quote: τὸν Ὅσιόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah”

your Holy One

Quote: τὸν Ὅσιόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah”

to see decay

Quote: ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Paul is using the word see to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay”

to see decay

Quote: ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body”

Acts 13:36

fell asleep

Quote: ἐκοιμήθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase fell asleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died”

was laid with his fathers and saw

Quote: προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶδεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers and he saw”

with his fathers

Quote: πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors”

saw decay

Quote: εἶδεν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Paul is using the word saw to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay”

decay

Quote: διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the term decay refers to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body”

Acts 13:37

he whom God raised up

Quote: ὃν & ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,”

God raised up

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life”

did not see decay

Quote: οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Paul is using the word see to mean “experience.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay”

decay

Quote: διαφθοράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body”

Acts 13:38

let it be known to you

Quote: γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know”

men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers”

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word brothers as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends”

this one

Quote: τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus”

release of sins is proclaimed to you and

Quote: ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we are proclaiming forgiveness of sins to you”

release of sins is proclaimed to you and from everything

Quote: ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “release of sins is proclaimed to you, and release is also proclaimed to you from the guilt of everything”

everything of which you were not able to be justified in the law of Moses

Quote: πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses”

Acts 13:39

In this one, everyone believing is justified

Quote: ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one”

this one

Quote: τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus”

Acts 13:40

Look

Quote: βλέπετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term Look to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful”

the thing spoken about in the prophets

Quote: τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about”

that … may not come upon you

Quote: μὴ ἐπέλθῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could come upon his listeners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that … may not happen to you”

Acts 13:41

Look, you despisers, and marvel and be destroyed! For I am doing a work in your days, a work that you would not believe at all, even if someone announced it to you

Quote: ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

Look

Quote: ἴδετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term Look to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful”

be destroyed

Quote: ἀφανίσθητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish”

am doing a work … a work

Quote: ἔργον ἐργάζομαι & ἔργον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

God is using the word work to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment”

in your days

Quote: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

God is using the term days to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime”

Acts 13:42

And as they were leaving

Quote: ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving”

they were begging

Quote: παρεκάλουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the pronoun they refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them for”

these words to be spoken to them

Quote: λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words to them”

these words

Quote: τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, words refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message”

Acts 13:43

when the synagogue meeting was ended

Quote: λυθείσης & τῆς συναγωγῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the synagogue meeting ended”

proselytes

Quote: προσηλύτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These proselytes were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “converts to Judaism”

followed Paul and Barnabas

Quote: ἠκολούθησαν & τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers”

to continue in the grace of God

Quote: προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them”

Acts 13:44

almost the whole city

Quote: σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The city represents the people in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city”

was gathered together

Quote: συνήχθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together”

to hear the word of the Lord

Quote: ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord”

the word of the Lord

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord”

Acts 13:45

the … Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

were filled with jealousy

Quote: ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “became very jealous”

the things being said by Paul

Quote: τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying”

Acts 13:46

the word of God to be spoken

Quote: λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God”

necessary for the word of God to be spoken to you first

Quote: ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul and Barnabas are using the term word to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God”

to you first

Quote: ὑμῖν & πρῶτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people, and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people, and God sent the Messiah initially to you”

Since you reject it

Quote: ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God”

judge yourselves not worthy of eternal life

Quote: οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you judge yourselves not worthy of eternal life”

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul and Barnabas are using the term behold to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

we are turning to the Gentiles

Quote: στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they are going to be physically turning toward the Gentiles. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles”

we are turning

Quote: στρεφόμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 13:47

us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

I have placed you as a light for the Gentiles, for you to be for salvation as far as the end of the earth

Quote: τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

I have placed you as a light

Quote: τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a light that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand.

you

Quote: σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

The word you is singular here because it refers to the Messiah.

for … to be for salvation as far as the end of the earth

Quote: εἶναί & εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved”

as far as the end of the earth

Quote: ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This phrase is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth”

Acts 13:48

the word of the Lord

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord”

appointed

Quote: τεταγμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed”

Acts 13:49

the word of the Lord

Quote: ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord”

the word of the Lord was being spread

Quote: διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord”

Acts 13:50

the Jews

Quote: οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

stirred up

Quote: παρώτρυναν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke says that the Jewish leaders stirred up these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated”

the influential worshiping women

Quote: τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας (1)

Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue”

the principal ones

Quote: τοὺς πρώτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective principal as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word ones to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men”

they threw them out

Quote: ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the influential women and important men, not to the Jewish leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the influential women and important men threw them out”

they threw them out from their boundaries

Quote: ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is probably not speaking literally when he says that they threw them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries”

their boundaries

Quote: τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia by association with the way that it had boundaries and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled”

Acts 13:51

they

Quote: οἱ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas”

having shaken off the dust of {their} feet against them

Quote: ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation.

Acts 13:52

the disciples

Quote: οἵ & μαθηταὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the disciples implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia”

were filled with joy and the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that joy and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence”

Acts 14

Acts 14 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.
• Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.
• Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“the word of his grace”

The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: grace, gracious and believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

Zeus and Hermes

In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: god, false god, goddess, idol, idolater, idolatrous, idolatry)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.

Acts 14:1

And it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

spoke

Quote: λαλῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus”

Acts 14:2

the disobeying Jews

Quote: οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι (1)

Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”

stirred up

Quote: ἐπήγειραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke says that these Jewsstirred up the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated”

the souls of the Gentiles

Quote: τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their souls, to mean all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles”

the brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

Acts 14:3

But

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Luke uses the word But here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless”

for the Lord

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

to the word

Quote: τῷ λόγῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message”

of his grace

Quote: τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us”

signs and wonders

Quote: σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles”

by their hands

Quote: διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hands represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them”

Acts 14:4

the multitude of the city was divided

Quote: ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other”

with the apostles

Quote: σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles”

Acts 14:5

to mistreat and stone them

Quote: ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word stone tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to mistreat Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “to put them to death by stoning them”

Acts 14:6

of Lycaonia

Quote: τῆς Λυκαονίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Lycaonia is the name of a district in Asia Minor

Derbe

Quote: Δέρβην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The wordDerbe is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra.

Acts 14:8

a certain man was sitting

Quote: τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation.

powerless in {his} feet

Quote: ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their feet when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him”

lame from the womb of his mother

Quote: χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the womb of his mother when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lame from the time he was born”

Acts 14:9

He heard Paul speaking, who looked intently at him and saw that he had faith

Quote: οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns

The pronouns he and him refer to the lame man, and the pronoun who refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith”

he had faith to be healed

Quote: ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him”

he had faith to be healed

Quote: ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean healed.) Alternate translation: “he could trust Jesus to heal him”

Acts 14:10

He said … he jumped up

Quote: εἶπεν & ἥλατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun He refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up”

Stand upright on your feet

Quote: ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk”

Stand upright on your feet

Quote: ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός! (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression Arise upon your feet contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!”

he jumped up

Quote: ἥλατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up”

Acts 14:11

raised their voice

Quote: ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”

raised their voice

Quote: ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase raised up their voice is an idiom that means that the crowds spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they said loudly”

saying in Lycaonian, “The gods, having been made like men, have come down to us

Quote: Λυκαονιστὶ λέγοντες, οἱ θεοὶ ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις, κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying in Lycaonian that the gods, having been made like men, had come down to them”

in Lycaonian

Quote: Λυκαονιστὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Lycaonian is the name of the language that was spoken in district District of Lycaonia.

having been made like men

Quote: ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having become like men”

Acts 14:12

Zeus

Quote: Δία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Zeus is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods.

Hermes

Quote: Ἑρμῆν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Hermes is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods.

and Paul “Hermes

Quote: τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’”

the leader of the word

Quote: ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message”

the leader of the word

Quote: ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker”

Acts 14:13

of Zeus, being before the city

Quote: τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the name Zeus to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus, which was before the city”

of Zeus, being before the city

Quote: τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, before means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “of the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city”

oxen and wreaths

Quote: ταύρους καὶ στέμματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the priest had put these wreaths on the oxen because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals”

was wanting to sacrifice with the crowds

Quote: σὺν τοῖς ὄχλοις ἤθελεν θύειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “was wanting to offer sacrifice with the crowds to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes”

Acts 14:14

tearing their clothing

Quote: διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Barnabas and Paul tore their clothes as a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “tearing their clothing to show how distressed they were that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them”

crying out

Quote: κράζοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together with the word “saying” in the next verse, the phrase “crying out” expresses a single idea. The phrase crying out tells how Barnabas and Paul were saying what they said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “saying loudly”

Acts 14:15

Men

Quote: ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women of Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “You people”

Men, why are you doing these things

Quote: ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you would express this question as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “People, you must not do these things!”

We also are men, like-passioned to you

Quote: καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings and not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!”

to turn you from these useless things to the living God

Quote: ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to turn from idol worship and believe in the one true God. They mean that the people should stop living in one way and should start living in another way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead”

these useless things

Quote: τούτων τῶν ματαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective useless as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods”

the living God

Quote: Θεὸν ζῶντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This expression is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists”

who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and everything in them

Quote: ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation”

Acts 14:16

to go their own ways

Quote: πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do”

Acts 14:17

he did not leave himself without witness

Quote: οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative preposition without. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like”

giving you rains from the sky

Quote: οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression rains from the sky contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “providing rain”

filling your hearts

Quote: ἐμπιπλῶν & τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their hearts, meaning their desires, to mean their entire beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you”

with food and gladness

Quote: τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word gladness tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food”

Acts 14:19

having persuaded the crowds

Quote: πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It may be helpful to state explicitly what they persuaded the crowds to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn violently against them”

Acts 14:20

him, … he entered … he went

Quote: αὐτὸν & εἰσῆλθεν & ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns him and he refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went”

Acts 14:21

having made many disciples

Quote: μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective many as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples”

Acts 14:22

strengthening the souls of the disciples

Quote: ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of the disciples, their souls, to represent their entire beings as believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were strengthening the disciples”

encouraging them to continue in the faith

Quote: παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus”

and {saying}, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions

Quote: καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions”

It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God

Quote: δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun kingdom with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king”

It is necessary for us to enter

Quote: δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and the believers to whom they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 14:23

having appointed … they entrusted … they had believed

Quote: χειροτονήσαντες & παρέθεντο & πεπιστεύκεισαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun they refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers”

by church

Quote: κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν (1)

Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers”

to the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus”

Acts 14:25

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

they went down to Attalia

Quote: κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul and Barnabas went down to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia”

Acts 14:26

where they had been commended to the grace of God

Quote: ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God”

where they had been commended to the grace of God

Quote: ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had asked God to care for them graciously”

Acts 14:27

they were reporting … them … he had opened

Quote: ἀνήγγελλον & αὐτῶν & ἤνοιξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns they and them refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun he refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened”

how much God had done with them

Quote: ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God had done something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership with God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do by working together with God”

he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles

Quote: ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the possessive form describes not a door consisting of faith but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith”

he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles

Quote: ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the expression opened a door means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith”

he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles

Quote: ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus”

Acts 14:28

for not a little time

Quote: χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time”

Acts 15

Acts 15 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses. Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: Quote Markings)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”

Acts 15:1

certain ones

Quote: τινες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews who believed in Jesus”

coming down from Judea

Quote: κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled”

were teaching the brothers

Quote: ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were teaching the believers”

Unless you are circumcised

Quote: ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you”

you are not able to be saved

Quote: οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you”

Acts 15:2

no little dispute and debate

Quote: στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, not, together with a word, little, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate”

dispute and debate

Quote: στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms dispute and debate mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy”

with them … they appointed … from among them

Quote: πρὸς αὐτοὺς & ἔταξαν & ἐξ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun they and the second instance of the pronoun them refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there”

to go up … in Jerusalem

Quote: ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says to go up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation.

Acts 15:3

the ones having been sent out by the church

Quote: οἱ & προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out”

the church

Quote: τῆς ἐκκλησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the phrase the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church”

describing the conversion of the Gentiles

Quote: ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of conversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how some of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God”

producing great joy in all the brothers

Quote: ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy”

in all the brothers

Quote: πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all the believers”

in all the brothers

Quote: πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The word all here may be a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “in the believers in those places”

Acts 15:4

they were welcomed by the church and the apostles and the elders

Quote: παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them”

the church and the apostles and the elders

Quote: τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the phrase the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the apostles and elders separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church”

how much God had done with them

Quote: ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated this same expression in 14:27. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God”

Acts 15:5

having believed

Quote: πεπιστευκότες (1)

Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus”

stood up

Quote: ἐξανέστησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

These believers stood up to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say”

them … command them

Quote: αὐτοὺς & παραγγέλλειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Both instances of the pronoun them refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in 15:3. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … command them”

Acts 15:6

were gathered together

Quote: συνήχθησάν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together”

to see about

Quote: ἰδεῖν περὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the phrase to see about is an idiom that means “to consider.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider”

this word

Quote: τοῦ λόγου τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made”

Acts 15:7

Peter, arising

Quote: ἀναστὰς Πέτρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Peter, standing up to show that he had something important to say”

them

Quote: αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers”

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers”

you … you

Quote: ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Both occurrences of you are plural since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

you know

Quote: ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

For emphasis, Peter is stating the pronoun you, whose meaning is already present in the verb know. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well”

from original days

Quote: ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,”

By my mouth

Quote: διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Peter is using one part of himself, his mouth, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Peter is using the term word to mean the message that he shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message”

Acts 15:8

the heart-knower

Quote: καρδιογνώστης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word heart refers to a person’s character and intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions”

testified to them

Quote: ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith”

just as also to us

Quote: καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us”

to us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is using the word us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 15:9

he did not distinguish between us and them

Quote: οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb distinguish, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us”

us

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is using the word us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

having cleansed their hearts by faith

Quote: τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally cleansed their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus”

having cleansed their hearts by faith

Quote: τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word hearts represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them because they believed in Jesus”

Acts 15:10

Now, therefore, why

Quote: νῦν οὖν τί (1)

Now in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me, therefore: Why”

why are you testing God, putting a yoke upon the neck of the disciples that neither our fathers nor we have been able to bear

Quote: τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear!”

our … we

Quote: ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is using the words our and we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction.

why are you testing God

Quote: τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν (1)

Here the word testing means challenging. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:9. Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”

putting a yoke upon the neck of the disciples that neither our fathers nor we have been able to bear

Quote: ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a yoke on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill”

the neck

Quote: τὸν τράχηλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of neck. Alternate translation: “the necks”

our fathers

Quote: οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

Acts 15:11

we believe ourselves to be saved

Quote: πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun ourselves. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved”

we believe ourselves to be saved

Quote: πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us”

we believe ourselves to be saved

Quote: πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Peter is using the pronoun we and the implied pronoun ourselves to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

through the grace of the Lord Jesus

Quote: διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through what God has graciously done for us through the Lord Jesus”

through the grace of the Lord Jesus

Quote: διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter means implicitly that we are saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses”

according to the way they also

Quote: καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way they also will be saved”

they also

Quote: κἀκεῖνοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Peter assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the pronoun they to refer to the Gentiles. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles also will be saved”

Acts 15:12

signs and wonders

Quote: σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation, as in UST: “great miracles”

Acts 15:13

James answered, saying

Quote: ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answered and saying mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting had said to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers”

Acts 15:14

Simeon

Quote: Συμεὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Simeon is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation.

God … looked

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself”

a people for his name

Quote: λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term name to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term name to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him”

Acts 15:15

the words of the prophets

Quote: οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

James is using the term words to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets”

as it is written

Quote: καθὼς γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote”

Acts 15:16

After these things I will return

Quote: μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18.

I will return, … I will rebuild … I will rebuild

Quote: ἀναστρέψω & ἀνοικοδομήσω & ἀνοικοδομήσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun I refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return”

I will return

Quote: ἀναστρέψω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again”

I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, and I will rebuild its ruins and restore it

Quote: ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it”

I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, and I will rebuild its ruins and restore it

Quote: ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a tent that had fallen down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty”

the fallen tent of David

Quote: τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen”

Acts 15:17

remnant of men

Quote: κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity”

may seek the Lord

Quote: ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord”

may seek the Lord

Quote: ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally seek or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord”

upon whom my name has been called upon them

Quote: ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called”

upon whom my name has been called upon them

Quote: ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name”

upon whom my name has been called upon them

Quote: ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

See how you translated the similar expression in 15:14. (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me”

Acts 15:18

known

Quote: γνωστὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known”

Acts 15:19

not to trouble the ones from the Gentiles turning to God

Quote: μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In your translation, you could make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble these Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses”

turning to God

Quote: ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically turning to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this expression plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him”

Acts 15:20

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.”

from the pollution of idols

Quote: τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of pollution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted”

from the pollution of idols

Quote: τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted”

from the pollution of idols

Quote: τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

James is likely talking about food that has been offered to idols, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols”

the strangled and blood

Quote: τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, for one thing, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. For another thing, while James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood, he is saying implicitly that they should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood, and from consuming blood”

and the strangled

Quote: καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

James is using the adjective strangled as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation”

the strangled

Quote: τοῦ πνικτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation”

Acts 15:21

For Moses has by city, from ancient generations, ones proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues on every Sabbath

Quote: Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshiping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this.

Moses has by city, from ancient generations, ones proclaiming him, being read

Quote: Μωϋσῆς & ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει & ἀναγινωσκόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

James is using the name Moses to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read”

being read

Quote: ἀναγινωσκόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses”

by city

Quote: κατὰ πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The expression by city means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews”

Acts 15:22

the whole church

Quote: ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the word church describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church”

the whole church

Quote: ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the church in Jerusalem. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “all the people of the church in Jerusalem”

Judas called Barsabbas

Quote: Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Judas and Barsabbas are the names of men. Barsabbas was another name by which Judas was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in 1:23.

Judas called Barsabbas

Quote: Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas”

the brothers

Quote: τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church”

Acts 15:23

writing by their hand

Quote: γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word hand to mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them”

their hand

Quote: χειρὸς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands”

The apostles and the elders, brothers, to the brothers among the Gentiles throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia: Greetings

Quote: οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν (1)

This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”

brothers, to the brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοὶ & ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The apostles and elders are using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers”

Acts 15:24

we have heard … us, … we did not commission

Quote: ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμῶν & οὐ διεστειλάμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here and in the rest of the letter, by we and us (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

from us

Quote: ἐξ ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word some refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea”

with words

Quote: λόγοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The apostles and elders are using the term words to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching”

upsetting your souls

Quote: ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to whom they are writing, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you”

Acts 15:26

men having handed over

Quote: ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By men, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those two men have handed over”

having handed over their souls

Quote: παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The letter is using the term souls to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives”

having handed over their souls

Quote: παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally handed over their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk”

for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ

Quote: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the name of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the name of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ”

Acts 15:27

reporting the same thing

Quote: ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The letter is using the adjective same as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds thing to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision”

by word

Quote: διὰ λόγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The letter is using the term word to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person”

Acts 15:28

no greater burden

Quote: μηδὲν πλέον & βάρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical burden that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation”

for no greater burden to be laid upon you

Quote: μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you”

Acts 15:29

from things sacrificed to idols

Quote: εἰδωλοθύτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The letter is using the adjective sacrificed, with the qualifier to idols, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols”

blood

Quote: αἵματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated blood in 15:20. Alternate translation: “consuming blood”

the strangled

Quote: πνικτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the strangled in 15:20. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation”

Farewell

Quote: ἔρρωσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation.

Acts 15:30

they, having been dismissed, … came down

Quote: οἱ & ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down”

they

Quote: οἱ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas”

came down

Quote: κατῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that these four men came down to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled”

came down

Quote: κατῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went down”

the crowd

Quote: τὸ πλῆθος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that by the crowd, he means the people of the church in Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the people of the church in Antioch”

Acts 15:31

they rejoiced

Quote: ἐχάρησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced”

at the encouragement

Quote: ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of encouragement, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged”

Acts 15:32

also being prophets themselves

Quote: καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

When Luke says also, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were 13:1. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were prophets”

the brothers

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers”

with many a word and strengthened them

Quote: διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ & καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them”

strengthened them

Quote: ἐπεστήριξαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith”

Acts 15:33

they were sent away with peace from the brothers

Quote: ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace”

the brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

to the ones having sent them

Quote: πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem”

Acts 15:34

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote.

Acts 15:35

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story.

the word of the Lord

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

Acts 15:36

days

Quote: ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the term days to mean “time.” Alternate translation: “time”

the brothers

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus”

the word of the Lord

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term word to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

how they are

Quote: πῶς ἔχουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing”

Acts 15:38

Paul was thinking it wise not to take with them this

Quote: Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them”

Acts 15:39

so as for them to be separated from each other and for Barnabas, taking Mark with him, to sail away to Cyprus

Quote: ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων; τόν τε Βαρναβᾶν παραλαβόντα τὸν Μᾶρκον, ἐκπλεῦσαι εἰς Κύπρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form to be separated, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they separated from each other and Barnabas, taking Mark with him, sailed away to Cyprus”

Acts 15:40

having been commended by the brothers

Quote: παραδοθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him”

to the grace

Quote: τῇ χάριτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus”

Acts 15:41

he was going through

Quote: διήρχετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through”

he was going through

Quote: διήρχετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke says he, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through”

strengthening the churches

Quote: ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term churches to refer to the people associated with the churches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches”

strengthening the churches

Quote: ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith”

Acts 16

Acts 16 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.
• Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi
• Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts 16:5 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.

Acts 16:1

he also came down

Quote: κατήντησεν & καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke says he, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down”

he also came down

Quote: κατήντησεν & καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul came down to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled”

he also came down

Quote: κατήντησεν & καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than came. Alternate translation: “he also went down”

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

a certain disciple was there, Timothy by name, the son of a believing Jewish woman but of a father, a Greek

Quote: μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain disciple to introduce Timothy as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy”

there

Quote: ἐκεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By there, Luke means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra”

of a believing Jewish woman

Quote: γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By believing, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus”

but of a father, a Greek

Quote: πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek”

Acts 16:2

who was being well attested by the brothers in Lystra and Iconium

Quote: ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him”

by the brothers

Quote: ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

Acts 16:3

he circumcised him

Quote: περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised”

this one

Quote: τοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy”

because of the Jews being in those places

Quote: διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By those places, Luke means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”

for they all knew that his father was a Greek

Quote: ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised”

they all knew

Quote: ᾔδεισαν & ἅπαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well”

Acts 16:4

they were going through … they were delivering to them

Quote: διεπορεύοντο & παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun them refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going … they were delivering to the believers in those cities”

to them to keep

Quote: αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep”

that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem

Quote: τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided”

Acts 16:5

the churches were being strengthened in the faith

Quote: αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith”

Acts 16:6

they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region, having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia

Quote: διῆλθον & τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region”

Phrygia … the Galatian region, … Asia

Quote: τὴν Φρυγίαν & Γαλατικὴν χώραν & τῇ Ἀσίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Phrygia is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in 2:10. The word Galatian describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word Asia is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor.

Phrygia and the Galatian region

Quote: τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia”

having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit

Quote: κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them”

having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit

Quote: κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia.

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

Acts 16:7

Mysia, … Bithynia

Quote: Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Mysia and Bithynia are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor.

the Spirit of Jesus

Quote: τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that by the Spirit of Jesus, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit”

Acts 16:8

they came down

Quote: κατέβησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy came down to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled”

they came down

Quote: κατέβησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went down”

Acts 16:9

Coming over

Quote: διαβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The man in the vision uses the phrase coming over because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea”

A man, a certain Macedonian

Quote: ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia”

Acts 16:10

he had seen

Quote: εἶδεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen”

we sought … God had summoned us

Quote: ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says we and us because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this.

we sought … God had summoned us

Quote: ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Luke is using the pronouns we and us to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

to them

Quote: αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia”

Acts 16:11

Samothrace, … Neapolis

Quote: Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Samothrace is the name of an island, and the word Neapolis is the name of a city.

and the next day to Neapolis

Quote: τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the next day we sailed to Neapolis”

Acts 16:12

and from there to Philippi

Quote: κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and from there we traveled overland to Philippi”

a colony

Quote: κολωνία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that by colony he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony”

a colony

Quote: κολωνία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In the Roman empire, a colony was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights”

Acts 16:14

a certain woman, Lydia by name, … was listening

Quote: τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία & ἤκουεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain woman to introduce Lydia as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening”

Lydia

Quote: Λυδία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Lydia is the name of a woman.

a seller of purple

Quote: πορφυρόπωλις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the color of purple cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth”

of Thyatira

Quote: Θυατείρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Thyatira is the name of a city.

worshiping God

Quote: σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression worshiping God means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in 10:2. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel”

whose heart the Lord opened

Quote: ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically opened Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed”

whose heart the Lord opened

Quote: ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the heart represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed”

to the things being said by Paul

Quote: τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying”

Acts 16:15

when she was baptized

Quote: ὡς & ἐβαπτίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized”

And when she was baptized

Quote: ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her”

and her household

Quote: καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized”

her household

Quote: ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, her household refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants”

you have judged

Quote: κεκρίκατέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

The word you is plural here. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

to the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus”

entering into my house, stay

Quote: εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests”

us

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Luke is using the pronoun us to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 16:16

And it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

a certain young female slave having a Python spirit met us

Quote: παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain young female slave to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us”

a Python spirit

Quote: πνεῦμα Πύθωνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is describing the spirit that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python; it was a demonic spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes”

Python

Quote: Πύθωνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Python is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination.

Acts 16:17

the way of salvation

Quote: ὁδὸν σωτηρίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

This woman is speaking as if salvation were a way or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation”

the way of salvation

Quote: ὁδὸν σωτηρίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you”

Acts 16:18

But Paul, having become annoyed and having turned, said

Quote: διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας & εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned and said”

in the name of Jesus Christ

Quote: ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ”

it came out in the same hour

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In the ancient world, an hour was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes; it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant”

Acts 16:19

their hope of profit had gone

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the masters could no longer profit from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes”

into the marketplace

Quote: εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The marketplace was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square”

to the rulers

Quote: ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas to the rulers in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them”

Acts 16:20

our city

Quote: ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city”

These men are greatly troubling our city

Quote: οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 16:21

to accept nor to practice

Quote: παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms accept and practice mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all”

Acts 16:22

the crowd rose up together

Quote: συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally rose up against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations”

them, … their … commanded them

Quote: αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & ἐκέλευον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns them and their refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas”

commanded them to be beaten with rods

Quote: ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods”

Acts 16:23

having laid many blows upon them

Quote: πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods”

they threw them into prison

Quote: ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers threw them into prison. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison”

Acts 16:24

stocks

Quote: ξύλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word stocks describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing stocks for readers who are not familiar with them.

threw them into the inner prison

Quote: ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer threw them into the inner prison. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison”

Acts 16:26

a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken

Quote: σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison”

the foundations of the prison were shaken

Quote: σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of the prison, its foundations, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being shaken. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison”

all the doors were opened

Quote: ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened”

the chains of all were unfastened

Quote: πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose”

of all

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that by all he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners”

Acts 16:27

he was about to kill himself, thinking the prisoners to have escaped

Quote: ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, νομίζων ἐκπεφευγέναι τοὺς δεσμίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will know that death was the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape”

the prison doors having been opened

Quote: ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open”

Acts 16:28

we are

Quote: ἐσμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Do not do harm to yourself

Quote: μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please do not hurt yourself”

Acts 16:29

having called for lights

Quote: αἰτήσας & φῶτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer called for lights because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this.

he fell down to Paul and Silas

Quote: προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “he knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas”

Acts 16:30

in order to be saved

Quote: ἵνα σωθῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me”

Acts 16:31

they

Quote: οἱ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas”

Believe in the Lord Jesus, and you will be saved

Quote: πίστευσον ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν καὶ σωθήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe in the Lord Jesus, you will be saved”

you will be saved

Quote: σωθήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you”

your household

Quote: ὁ οἶκός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, your household refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family”

Acts 16:32

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

Acts 16:33

at that hour of the night

Quote: ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the term hour to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night”

he was baptized

Quote: ἐβαπτίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him”

Acts 16:34

he set a table before them

Quote: παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a table. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal”

Acts 16:35

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in 16:16. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story.

Acts 16:36

the words

Quote: τοὺς λόγους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term words to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message”

coming out, go in peace

Quote: ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

The word go is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace”

go in peace

Quote: πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further”

Acts 16:37

to them

Quote: πρὸς αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says them and not just him, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers”

them, “… they threw us … they cast us out … let them lead us out

Quote: αὐτούς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν & ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun they and the second instance of the pronoun them refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out”

us … they threw us … us … us

Quote: ἡμᾶς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Having beaten us in public without trial, men being Romans, they threw us into prison, and now they cast us out secretly

Quote: δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!”

Having beaten us in public

Quote: δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public”

For not

Quote: οὔ γάρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that”

coming themselves, let them lead us out

Quote: ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ, ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Paul is using the reflexive pronoun themselves for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out”

let them lead us out

Quote: ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they lead us out” or “they should lead us out”

let them lead us out

Quote: ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain.

Acts 16:38

these words

Quote: τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term words to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said”

they were terrified, hearing that they were Romans

Quote: ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were terrified that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas”

they were terrified, hearing that they were Romans

Quote: ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’”

Acts 16:39

they entreated them, … bringing them out, they were asking them

Quote: παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς & ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun them refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas”

they entreated them

Quote: παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke means implicitly that the magistrates entreated or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them”

Acts 16:40

So

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word So to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.

Lydia

Quote: τὴν Λυδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to the house of Lydia by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia”

they came

Quote: εἰσῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went”

the brothers

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

and went out

Quote: καὶ ἐξῆλθαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke says that they … went out, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi”

and went out

Quote: καὶ ἐξῆλθαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since Luke says they … went out, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this.

Acts 17

Acts 17 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.
• Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea. Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The religion of Athens

Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: god, false god, goddess, idol, idolater, idolatrous, idolatry)

As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.

Acts 17:1

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

Amphipolis and Apollonia

Quote: τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Amphipolis and Apollonia are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia.

a synagogue of the Jews

Quote: συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression a synagogue of the Jews contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue”

Acts 17:2

them, … with them

Quote: αὐτοὺς & αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue”

Acts 17:3

fully opening them and demonstrating

Quote: διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with and. The phrase fully opening them tells how Paul was demonstrating from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “by opening the Scriptures fully, demonstrating”

fully opening them

Quote: διανοίγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally opening the Scriptures fully, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly”

to rise

Quote: ἀναστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the word rise to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died”

Acts 17:4

some from them were persuaded

Quote: τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood”

of worshiping Greeks

Quote: τῶν & σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression worshiping God describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in 16:14. Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel”

not a few

Quote: οὐκ ὀλίγαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many”

Acts 17:5

the Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

from the marketplace

Quote: τῶν ἀγοραίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The marketplace was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in 16:20.

the city

Quote: τὴν πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The word city represents the people of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city”

of Jason

Quote: Ἰάσονος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke does not tell us anything further about this Jason, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,”

of Jason

Quote: Ἰάσονος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Jason is the name of a man.

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas”

Acts 17:6

certain brothers

Quote: τινας ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers”

The ones having turned the world upside down

Quote: οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The Jewish leaders are exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone”

Acts 17:8

they agitated

Quote: ἐτάραξαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders”

Acts 17:9

a bond

Quote: τὸ ἱκανὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A bond was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee.

they released them

Quote: ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the city officials, and the pronoun them refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them”

Acts 17:10

the brothers

Quote: οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

the synagogue of the Jews

Quote: τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression the synagogue of the Jews contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue”

Acts 17:11

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

these … those} in Thessalonica

Quote: οὗτοι & τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun these to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun those to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica”

more noble than

Quote: εὐγενέστεροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the word noble, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus”

with all readiness

Quote: μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness”

these things

Quote: ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus”

whether these things might be so

Quote: εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so”

Acts 17:12

not a few men

Quote: ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men”

Acts 17:13

the word of God was also being proclaimed by Paul

Quote: καὶ & κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God”

the word of God

Quote: ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God”

exciting and troubling the crowds

Quote: σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms exciting and troubling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting”

Acts 17:14

the brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

as far as to the sea

Quote: ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression as far as to the sea contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast”

Acts 17:15

to Silas and Timothy that they should come to him as quickly as possible, they departed

Quote: πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed”

Acts 17:16

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy”

his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols

Quote: παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him”

his spirit was being provoked within him

Quote: παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him”

his spirit was being provoked within him

Quote: παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the spirit represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities”

Acts 17:17

the ones worshiping

Quote: τοῖς σεβομένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated the similar expression in 16:14. Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel”

in the marketplace

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the similar expression in 16:19. Alternate translation: “in the public square”

Acts 17:18

with him. … He seems … he was proclaiming

Quote: αὐτῷ & δοκεῖ & εὐηγγελίζετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns him, He, and he all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming”

of the Epicurean … philosophers

Quote: τῶν Ἐπικουρίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Epicurean is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures.

Stoic

Quote: Στοϊκῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Stoic is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal, loving God and the resurrection.

word-picker

Quote: ὁ σπερμολόγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person”

of foreign gods

Quote: ξένων δαιμονίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new gods that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis”

Acts 17:19

Areopagus

Quote: Ἄρειον Πάγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Areopagus means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill”

to the Areopagus

Quote: ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word Areopagus by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus”

Are we able to know what this new teaching {is} that is being spoken by you

Quote: δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you”

Are we able

Quote: δυνάμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

that is being spoken by you

Quote: ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking”

Acts 17:20

you are bringing some startling things into our ears

Quote: ξενίζοντα & τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objects that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things”

For you are bringing some startling things into our ears

Quote: ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The philosophers are referring to hearing by association with the ears, which people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things”

our … we wish

Quote: ἡμῶν & βουλόμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By our and we, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

what these things want to be

Quote: τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean”

Acts 17:21

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

all the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners were devoting their leisure

Quote: Ἀθηναῖοι & πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι & ηὐκαίρουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure”

the Athenians

Quote: Ἀθηναῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens.

were devoting their leisure to nothing other than

Quote: εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here, Luke says nothing other as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “made it their favorite leisure activity”

something newer

Quote: τι καινότερον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form newer with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new”

Acts 17:22

And Paul, having been stood in the middle of the Areopagus, was saying

Quote: σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form having been stood, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying”

in the middle of the Areopagus

Quote: ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

As in 17:19, Luke uses the word Areopagus by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill”

Men, Athenians

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians”

more religious

Quote: δεισιδαιμονεστέρους (1)

Paul is using the comparative form more religious for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious”

in everything

Quote: κατὰ πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says everything here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways”

Acts 17:23

an altar on which had been inscribed, ‘To an Unknown God

Quote: βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (See: next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god”

an altar on which had been inscribed, ‘To an Unknown God

Quote: βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation.

on which had been inscribed

Quote: ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed”

Acts 17:24

of heaven and earth

Quote: οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists”

hand-built temples

Quote: χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of a person, the hand, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made”

Acts 17:25

is he cared for by hands of men

Quote: ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him”

needing anything

Quote: προσδεόμενός τινος (1)

Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything”

by hands of men

Quote: ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of a person, the hands, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people”

himself giving

Quote: αὐτὸς διδοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Paul is using the word himself for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives”

life and breath

Quote: ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms life and breath mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself”

to all

Quote: πᾶσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By all, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people”

Acts 17:26

one

Quote: ἑνὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By one, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam”

every nation of men

Quote: πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity”

Acts 17:27

to seek God

Quote: ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul means implicitly that God did the things he described in the previous verse, giving the nations of humanity particular times to live in particular places, so that they would seek him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God did this so that people would seek him”

they might feel around for him and find him

Quote: ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if people could feel around for God and find him that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him”

not … far from

Quote: οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to”

of us

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Paul is using the pronoun us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 17:28

him … offspring

Quote: αὐτῷ & γένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns him and his refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring”

we live … are

Quote: ζῶμεν & ἐσμέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Paul is using the pronoun we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

For ‘in him we live and are moved and are,’ and as some of your own poets have said, For we too are {his} offspring

Quote: ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (See: next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring”

For ‘in him we live and are moved and are,’ and as some of your own poets have said, For we too are {his} offspring

Quote: ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations.

For ‘in him we live and are moved and are

Quote: ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The expressions live and are moved and are mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “For he is the source of our entire existence”

For ‘in him we live and are moved and are

Quote: ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form are moved, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For ‘he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist’”

For we too are {his} offspring

Quote: τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s offspring or children. They are speaking and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring”

Acts 17:29

being offspring of God

Quote: γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s offspring or children. He means that God created people, and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children”

the Divine

Quote: τὸ θεῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective Divine as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God”

to gold or silver or stone

Quote: χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone”

images of the skill and imagination of man

Quote: χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human skill and imagination but to describe the qualities that people use to create images or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination”

of man

Quote: ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans”

Acts 17:30

times of ignorance

Quote: χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe times that were themselves ignorant but times when people were characterized by spiritual ignorance. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God”

to men

Quote: τοῖς ἀνθρώποις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people”

Acts 17:31

the world

Quote: τὴν οἰκουμένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the term world refers to the people who live in the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the world”

in righteousness

Quote: ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by his own righteous standards”

by the man whom he has appointed

Quote: ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the man, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed”

having provided assurance to all

Quote: πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of assurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having given everyone reason to believe surely”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died”

Acts 17:32

of the dead

Quote: νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who have died”

We will hear

Quote: ἀκουσόμεθά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By We, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

also again

Quote: καὶ πάλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression also again contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time”

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens.

hearing of

Quote: ἀκούσαντες (1)

These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.

some indeed mocked

Quote: οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον (1)

These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”

Acts 17:34

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.

certain men

Quote: τινὲς & ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of Damaris shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people”

being joined to him, believed

Quote: κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

The people Luke describes here believed before they were joined to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him”

being joined to him

Quote: κολληθέντες αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him”

Dionysius the Areopagite

Quote: Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Dionysius is the name of a man. The word Areopagite is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus.

Damaris

Quote: Δάμαρις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Damaris is the name of a woman.

Acts 18

Acts 18 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.
• Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.
• Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: faithful, faithfulness, trustworthy and Christ, Messiah and repent, repentance)

Acts 18:1

After these things

Quote: μετὰ ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the phrase After these things to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

he went

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went”

Acts 18:2

And having found

Quote: καὶ εὑρών (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word found does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet”

a certain Jew

Quote: τινα Ἰουδαῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain Jew to introduce Aquila as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there”

a Pontian

Quote: Ποντικὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Pontian was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in 2:9.

having recently come from Italy, also Priscilla, his wife, because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome

Quote: προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife”

Claudius

Quote: Κλαύδιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Claudius is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in 11:28.

Acts 18:5

General Information:

Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.

came down

Quote: κατῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Silas and Timothy came down to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled”

Paul was constrained by the word

Quote: συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word”

Paul was constrained by the word

Quote: συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke speaks of the word as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word”

Paul was constrained by the word

Quote: συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus”

Acts 18:6

shaking out {his} garments

Quote: ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in 13:51.

Your blood {be} upon your head

Quote: τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, blood represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus”

Your blood {be} upon your head

Quote: τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of a person, the head, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility”

Your blood {be} upon your head

Quote: τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

The word your is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

your head

Quote: τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of head. Alternate translation: “your heads”

I am clean

Quote: καθαρὸς ἐγώ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if he were physically clean. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you”

Acts 18:7

of a certain one worshiping God

Quote: τινὸς & σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated the similar expression in 16:14. Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel”

Titius Justus

Quote: Τιτίου Ἰούστου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Titius Justus are the names of a man.

Acts 18:8

Crispus

Quote: Κρίσπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Crispus is the name of a man.

in the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus”

his whole house

Quote: ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, house refers to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household”

were being baptized

Quote: ἐβαπτίζοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism”

Acts 18:9

Do not fear

Quote: μὴ φοβοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not fear what people might do to him if he continues proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel”

Lord … the

Quote: ὁ Κύριος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”

speak and do not be silent

Quote: λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The expressions speak and do not be silent mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue speaking”

do not be silent

Quote: μὴ σιωπήσῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not be silent about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel”

Acts 18:10

I am with you

Quote: ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Jesus is stating the pronoun I, whose meaning is already present in the verb am, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you”

much people is to me in this city

Quote: λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me”

Acts 18:11

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God”

Acts 18:12

Gallio

Quote: Γαλλίωνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Gallio is the name of a man.

of Achaia

Quote: τῆς Ἀχαΐας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Achaia was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province.

the Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

rose up

Quote: κατεπέστησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the expression rose up means that the Jewish leaders took action, specifically to oppose Paul. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action against”

unanimously

Quote: ὁμοθυμαδὸν (1)

The word unanimously indicates that the Jews in Corinth recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in 1:14. Alternate translation: “all together”

brought him to the judgment seat

Quote: ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The term judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio the governor sat when he made legal decisions in court. The implication is that the Jewish leaders wanted Gallio to judge and punish Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “brought him before the judgment seat so that the governor would judge and punish him”

Acts 18:13

This one

Quote: οὗτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul”

men

Quote: τοὺς ἀνθρώπους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people”

contrary to the law

Quote: παρὰ τὸν νόμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the law, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law”

Acts 18:14

to open {his} mouth

Quote: ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to “speaking” by association with a person would open his mouth in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak”

the Jews

Quote: τοὺς Ἰουδαίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing

Quote: εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today”

some crime or evil wrongdoing

Quote: ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms crime and wrongdoing mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime”

Acts 18:15

if

Quote: εἰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact

Gallio is speaking as if what follows was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker knows that it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since”

word

Quote: λόγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

By word, Gallio likely means speech, expressed in words, as opposed to action. He is saying that what Paul has been saying is not a matter of great importance if he has not actually committed any crime. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “teaching”

names

Quote: ὀνομάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By names, Gallio likely means the question of whether Jesus can be called the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that.

you will see yourselves

Quote: ὄψεσθε αὐτοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Gallio is using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must see yourselves”

you will see yourselves

Quote: ὄψεσθε αὐτοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

By see, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves”

Acts 18:16

he sent them away from the judgment seat

Quote: ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court”

Acts 18:17

Sosthenes

Quote: Σωσθένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Sosthenes is the name of a man.

the synagogue leader

Quote: τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since Luke says in 18:8 that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus”

But having seized Sosthenes, the synagogue leader, they were all beating him before the judgment seat

Quote: ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him”

they were all beating him

Quote: πάντες & ἔτυπτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke likely says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him”

Acts 18:18

But Paul, having stayed yet many days

Quote: ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Luke is using the word But here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then”

the brothers

Quote: τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

Cenchrea

Quote: Κενχρεαῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cenchreae is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth.

having shorn {his} head in Cenchrea, for he had a vow

Quote: κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Paul cut the hair off his head to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut off his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God”

for he had a vow

Quote: εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a vow as the explanation for why he stayed yet many days in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, having stayed many days.

for he had a vow

Quote: εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add any information in your translation about why Paul made it.

a vow

Quote: εὐχήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This vow was a promise that a person in this culture made to God that he would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. A person might do this to express his sincerity about something he was praying for, to acknowledge something that God had done for him, or to consecrate himself to deeper devotion to God for a time. In your translation, you may be able to use the word for a comparable practice in your culture. Alternate translation: “made a special promise to God not to cut his hair for a time in order to be more devoted”

Acts 18:19

And they came down to Ephesus and them he left there

Quote: κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun them refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there”

they came down to Ephesus

Quote: κατήντησαν & εἰς Ἔφεσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila came down to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus”

Acts 18:20

when they asked him

Quote: ἐρωτώντων & αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him”

Acts 18:22

having come down to Caesarea

Quote: κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul had come down to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea”

having gone up

Quote: ἀναβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by having gone up. he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem”

having gone up

Quote: ἀναβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul had gone up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem”

the church

Quote: τὴν ἐκκλησίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is saying the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church”

he went down

Quote: κατέβη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul went down to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation.

Acts 18:23

going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia in succession

Quote: διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke means that Paul visited in succession the churches in the region of Galatia and Phrygia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession”

strengthening all the disciples

Quote: στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples”

Acts 18:24

Now

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about Apollos that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

a certain Jewish man

Quote: Ἰουδαῖος & τις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain Jewish man to introduce Apollos as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish man”

a … Jewish man

Quote: Ἰουδαῖος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective Jewish as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds man to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew”

an Alexandrian

Quote: Ἀλεξανδρεὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Alexandrian is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in 6:9.

came down to Ephesus

Quote: κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos came down to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus”

being mighty in the Scriptures

Quote: δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of Apollos as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures”

Acts 18:25

he was speaking and teaching

Quote: ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word speaking tells how Apollos was teaching about Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he spoke, he taught”

He had been taught

Quote: οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him”

the way of the Lord

Quote: τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus”

being fervent in spirit

Quote: ζέων τῷ πνεύματι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the spirit represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic”

the baptism of John

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a baptism that John received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”

Acts 18:26

the way of God

Quote: τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus”

Acts 18:27

when he desired

Quote: βουλομένου & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired”

to pass over into Achaia

Quote: διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke uses the expression pass over here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia”

the brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers”

the ones having believed by grace

Quote: τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe”

Acts 18:28

in public

Quote: δημοσίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word public, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen”

Acts 19

Acts 19 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

• Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.
• Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.
• Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.

Acts 19:20 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Temple of Artemis

The temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.

Acts 19:1

And it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the phrase And it happened that to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

passing through the upper parts

Quote: διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke says that Paul traveled through the upper parts of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than did the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia (18:23), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will (18:21). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route”

came down to

Quote: κατελθεῖν εἰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Paul came down to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in”

certain disciples

Quote: τινας μαθητάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase certain disciples to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city”

Acts 19:2

And he said to them, “If you received the Holy Spirit, having believed

Quote: εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε, πιστεύσαντες? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “And he asked them if they had received the Holy Spirit when they believed.”

Acts 19:3

Into what then were you baptized

Quote: εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?”

Into the baptism of John

Quote: εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed”

of John

Quote: Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By John, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist”

Acts 19:4

John baptized a baptism

Quote: Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα (1)

Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism”

a baptism of repentance

Quote: βάπτισμα μετανοίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent”

Acts 19:5

they were baptized

Quote: ἐβαπτίσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized”

they were baptized

Quote: ἐβαπτίσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism”

in the name of the Lord Jesus

Quote: εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord”

Acts 19:6

Paul having laid hands on them

Quote: ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Paul laid his hands on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:17.

the Holy Spirit came upon them

Quote: ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the Holy Spirit physically came upon these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit”

they were speaking in languages

Quote: ἐλάλουν & γλώσσαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know”

Acts 19:7

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.

Acts 19:8

he was speaking boldly

Quote: ἐπαρρησιάζετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly”

reasoning and persuading

Quote: διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase reasoning tells how Paul was persuading people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading”

about the kingdom of God

Quote: περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God had begun to rule as king”

about the kingdom of God

Quote: περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was teaching that the kingdom of God had begun on earth when Jesus came as the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “about how, when Jesus came as the Messiah, God had begun to rule as king”

Acts 19:9

were being hardened and disobeying

Quote: ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase being hardened tells how some in the Ephesus synagogue were disobeying what God wanted them to do, according to Paul’s teaching. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “stubbornly disobeying”

were being hardened

Quote: ἐσκληρύνοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were hardening themselves”

of the Way

Quote: τὴν ὁδὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in 9:2. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way”

of Tyrannus

Quote: Τυράννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Tyrannus is the name of a man.

Acts 19:10

all living in Asia heard

Quote: πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

the word of the Lord

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord”

Acts 19:11

not ordinary

Quote: οὐ τὰς τυχούσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary”

the hands of Paul

Quote: τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of Paul, his hands, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul”

Acts 19:12

even handkerchiefs or aprons from his skin were taken to the sick

Quote: καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick”

handkerchiefs or aprons from his skin

Quote: ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s skin. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used”

handkerchiefs

Quote: σουδάρια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These handkerchiefs were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation.

aprons

Quote: σιμικίνθια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These aprons were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation.

the sick

Quote: τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick”

their} illnesses departed from them

Quote: ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of these illnesses as if they were living thing that could depart from a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses”

Acts 19:13

Now

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

of the … exorcists

Quote: ἐξορκιστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These exorcists were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does.

the name

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority”

by the Jesus

Quote: τὸν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The exorcists are referring to Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus”

Acts 19:14

Now

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about these seven sons of Sceva that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

seven sons of Sceva, a certain Jewish chief priest, were doing this

Quote: ἦσαν & τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain Jewish high priest to introduce his seven sons as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this”

of Sceva

Quote: Σκευᾶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Sceva is the name of a man.

Acts 19:15

answering, the evil spirit said

Quote: ἀποκριθὲν & τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answering and said mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded”

the evil spirit

Quote: τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By the evil spirit, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that.

but you, who are you

Quote: ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!”

you, who are you

Quote: ὑμεῖς & τίνες ἐστέ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The evil spirit is stating the pronoun you, whose meaning is already present in the verb are, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!”

Acts 19:16

them both

Quote: ἀμφοτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit”

Acts 19:17

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.

this became known to all living in Ephesus

Quote: τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this”

this became known to all living in Ephesus

Quote: τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus”

fear fell upon them all

Quote: ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of fear as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid”

fear fell upon them all

Quote: ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid”

the name of the Lord Jesus was being magnified

Quote: ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus”

the name of the Lord Jesus was being magnified

Quote: ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the word name stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation”

Acts 19:18

confessing and declaring

Quote: ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase declaring tells how these believers were confessing the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing”

Acts 19:19

the magical arts

Quote: τὰ περίεργα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective magical as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word arts to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic”

their} books

Quote: τὰς βίβλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word books refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations”

five myriad pieces of silver

Quote: ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

Each of these pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might say something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages”

pieces of silver

Quote: ἀργυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

Each of the pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer.

Acts 19:20

the word of the Lord was increasing and prevailing

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of the way that the word of the Lord was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was increasing and prevailing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God”

the word

Quote: ὁ λόγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message”

of the Lord

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus”

Acts 19:21

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

when these things were fulfilled, Paul determined in the Spirit to travel

Quote: ὡς & ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι & πορεύεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word fulfilled conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel”

it is necessary for me also to see Rome

Quote: δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context, the word see means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome”

Acts 19:22

Erastus

Quote: Ἔραστον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Erastus is the name of a man.

Acts 19:23

no small disturbance

Quote: τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance”

the Way

Quote: τῆς ὁδοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in 19:9.

Acts 19:24

a certain silversmith … was bringing

Quote: τις & ἀργυροκόπος & παρείχετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain silversmith to introduce Demetrius as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing”

Demetrius

Quote: Δημήτριος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Demetrius is the name of a man.

a certain silversmith making silver shrines of Artemis

Quote: τις & ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke provides this background information about Demetrius to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

silver shrines of Artemis

Quote: ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here.

a … silversmith

Quote: ἀργυροκόπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A silversmith is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation.

not a little business

Quote: οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business”

Acts 19:25

whom, having gathered together, and the workers about such things, said

Quote: οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν (1)

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said”

about such things

Quote: περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective such as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word things to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts”

Acts 19:26

you see and hear

Quote: θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly”

has removed a considerable crowd

Quote: μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Demetrius is speaking as if Paul had physically removed a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines”

the things coming into being through hands

Quote: οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Demetrius is using one part of the artisans, their hands, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which people make”

Acts 19:27

the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be considered as nothing

Quote: τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing”

whom all Asia, indeed the world, worships

Quote: ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship”

whom all Asia, indeed the world, worships

Quote: ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the words Asia and the world refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship”

Acts 19:28

they were shouting

Quote: ἔκραζον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting”

becoming full of anger

Quote: γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the craftsmen as if they were containers that anger filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry”

Acts 19:29

the city was filled with confusion

Quote: ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city”

the city was filled with confusion

Quote: ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking of the city as if they was a container that confusion filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city”

the city was filled with confusion

Quote: ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confusion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused”

the theater

Quote: τὸ θέατρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The theater in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium”

Gaius … Aristarchus

Quote: Γάϊον & Ἀρίσταρχον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Gaius and Aristarchus are names of men.

Acts 19:31

of the Asiarchs

Quote: τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Asiarchs is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia.

to him, … him, were urging him … himself

Quote: αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & παρεκάλουν & ἑαυτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns him and himself refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself”

to give himself into the theater

Quote: δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression to give himself means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater”

Acts 19:33

instructed Alexander

Quote: συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that some people instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone”

Alexander

Quote: Ἀλέξανδρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Alexander is the name of a man.

waving {his} hand

Quote: κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This likely means that Alexander was waving his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak”

to give a defense to the people

Quote: ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business”

Acts 19:34

recognizing that he was a Jew

Quote: ἐπιγνόντες & ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’”

one voice happened from {them} all, while shouting

Quote: φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς & κραζόντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only one voice. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together”

Acts 19:35

the city clerk

Quote: ὁ γραμματεὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This city clerk was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman”

says

Quote: φησίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”

Men, Ephesians

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus”

for who is there

Quote: τίς γάρ ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there”

who is there of men who does not know the Ephesian city to be the temple keeper of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image

Quote: τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!”

who is there of men who does not know

Quote: τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know”

who is there of men who does not know

Quote: τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well”

who is there of men

Quote: τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well”

the Ephesian city to be the temple keeper of the great Artemis

Quote: τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

The term temple keeper was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis”

of the Zeus-fallen image

Quote: τοῦ διοπετοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The city clerk is using the adjective Zeus-fallen as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word image to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus”

of the Zeus-fallen image

Quote: τοῦ διοπετοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Zeus is the name of a pagan god.

Acts 19:36

to be calmed

Quote: κατεσταλμένους ὑπάρχειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to calm down”

to do nothing rash

Quote: μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The city clerk means implicitly that it would be rash for the people to do anything to harm Gaius and Aristarchus, as he says in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to act impulsively and hurt the two men you have brought here”

to do nothing rash

Quote: μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word nothing and the negative adjective rash. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do”

Acts 19:37

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.”

these men {who are

Quote: τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun these refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this.

Acts 19:38

have a word against anyone

Quote: ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The city clerk is using the term word to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone”

the courts are being conducted and there are proconsuls

Quote: ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions”

proconsuls

Quote: ἀνθύπατοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The proconsuls were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges”

let them accuse one another

Quote: ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another”

let them accuse one another

Quote: ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond”

Acts 19:39

But if you seek anything about other matters

Quote: εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word seek does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss”

it will be settled in the regular assembly

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it”

it will be settled in the regular assembly

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly”

the regular assembly

Quote: τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This regular assembly refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you could use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting”

Acts 19:40

we are in danger of being accused

Quote: κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, the context suggests that it would be the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us”

the today

Quote: τῆς σήμερον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The city clerk is leaving out a word that a sentence would ordinarily need in Greek in order to be complete. The clerk is abbreviating the expression “the today day,” which means “this day.” You can say that in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “this day”

the today

Quote: τῆς σήμερον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The city clerk is referring to the events that were nearly a riot, by association with the day on which they took place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the events of this day”

there being no cause about which we will be able to give an account

Quote: μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχοντος, περὶ οὗ οὐ δυνησόμεθα ἀποδοῦναι λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there being no cause about which we will not be able to give an account.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “because we would have to have a reason in order to give an account”

Acts 20

Acts 20 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: Metaphor and INVALID bible/kt/discipline)

“Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.

Acts 20:2

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the believers in the regions of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there”

Acts 20:3

by the Jews

Quote: ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews”

he returned of a resolution through Macedonia

Quote: γνώμης τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression of a resolution means that Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved to return through Macedonia”

against him being about to sail to Syria

Quote: αὐτῷ & μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν (1)

Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”

Acts 20:4

Sopater of Pyrrhus, … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus

Quote: Σώπατρος Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

These words are the names of five men.

Sopater of Pyrrhus

Quote: Σώπατρος Πύρρου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the possessive form indicates that Sopater is the son of Pyrrhus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus”

a Berean, … of the Thessalonians, … a Derbean, … Asians

Quote: Βεροιαῖος & Θεσσαλονικέων & Δερβαῖος & Ἀσιανοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Berean is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word Thessalonians describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word Derbean is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word Asians describes people from the province of Asia.

Aristarchus … Gaius

Quote: Ἀρίσταρχος & Γάϊος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Aristarchus and Gaius are the names of men. See how you translated these names in 19:29.

Acts 20:5

for us

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns us and we to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction.

they

Quote: οὗτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men”

for us

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says us because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this.

Acts 20:6

the days of Unleavened Bread

Quote: τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Unleavened Bread are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several days. See how you translated this in 12:3.

Acts 20:7

the first of the week

Quote: τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular day of the week. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week”

the first of the week

Quote: τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the believers met on the first of the week because that was the day Jesus rose from the dead. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week, when Jesus rose from the dead”

we having been gathered together

Quote: συνηγμένων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together”

with them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas”

to break bread

Quote: κλάσαι ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke could be using the word break to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility.

to break bread

Quote: κλάσαι ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By to break bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message”

Acts 20:8

many lamps were in the upper room where we were gathered together

Quote: ἦσαν & λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication seems to be that it became warm in this upper room because there were many lamps lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it”

upper room

Quote: ὑπερῴῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in 9:37.

we were gathered together

Quote: ἦμεν συνηγμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together”

Acts 20:9

Eutychus

Quote: Εὔτυχος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Eutychus is the name of a man.

on the window

Quote: ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This window was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall”

being overcome by a deep sleep, … having been overcome by sleep

Quote: καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him”

being overcome by a deep sleep, … having been overcome by sleep

Quote: καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of sleep as if it were a living thing that could overcome Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep”

third story

Quote: τριστέγου (1)

In this culture, the third story meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two stories above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers.

was picked up dead

Quote: ἤρθη νεκρός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead”

was picked up dead

Quote: ἤρθη νεκρός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they lifted him from the ground, but he had died”

Acts 20:10

Do not be troubled

Quote: μὴ θορυβεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you”

his life is in him

Quote: ἡ & ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive”

Acts 20:11

having broken bread and having tasted

Quote: κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke could be using the words broken and tasted to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility.

having broken bread and having tasted

Quote: κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers”

he left

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left”

Acts 20:12

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of Eutychus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.

the boy

Quote: τὸν παῖδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by the boy, he means Eutychus. You can use his name if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Eutychus”

were comforted

Quote: παρεκλήθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this comforted them”

not moderately

Quote: οὐ μετρίως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “greatly”

Acts 20:13

Then we, having gone ahead to the ship, sailed away to Assos, intending to take Paul on board there, for thus he had arranged, intending to go on foot himself

Quote: ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόντες ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον, ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον, ἐκεῖθεν μέλλοντες ἀναλαμβάνειν τὸν Παῦλον; οὕτως γὰρ διατεταγμένος, ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Paul intended to go on foot to Assos and he arranged for us to take him on board there, so we went ahead to the ship and sailed away to Assos”

Assos

Quote: τὴν Ἆσσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Assos is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea.

intending to go on foot himself

Quote: μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In light of what Paul says in 20:23, that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to go on foot himself so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray”

Acts 20:14

Mitylene

Quote: Μιτυλήνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Mitylene is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea.

Acts 20:15

we came down

Quote: κατηντήσαμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that he and his traveling companions came down to a point on the mainland opposite Chios because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed”

Chios

Quote: Χίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Chios is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea.

Samos

Quote: Σάμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Samos is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea.

Miletus

Quote: Μίλητον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Miletus is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor.

Acts 20:16

so that it would not happen to him to lose time

Quote: ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking about time as if it were a commodity that a person could lose. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time”

Acts 20:17

he summoned

Quote: μετεκαλέσατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent”

Acts 20:18

You know, from the first day from which I set foot in Asia, how I was with you the whole time

Quote: ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia”

You know

Quote: ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Paul is stating the pronoun you, whose meaning is already present in the verb know, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know”

I set foot in Asia

Quote: ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of himself, his foot, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia”

Acts 20:19

the Lord

Quote: τῷ Κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”

with all humility

Quote: μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great humility”

with all humility

Quote: μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of humility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very humbly”

tears

Quote: δακρύων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds tears of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling”

and trials happening to me

Quote: καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me”

of the Jews

Quote: τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews”

Acts 20:20

how I withheld nothing being useful in order not to declare it to you

Quote: ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says nothing here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you”

how I withheld nothing being useful in order not to declare it to you

Quote: ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word nothing and the negative particle not. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you”

Acts 20:21

testifying … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus

Quote: διαμαρτυρόμενος & τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus”

repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus

Quote: τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of repentance and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus”

our

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Paul is using the pronoun our to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 20:22

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

having been bound by the Spirit

Quote: δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me”

having been bound by the Spirit

Quote: δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if the Spirit had bound him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse”

not knowing the things that will happen to me in her

Quote: τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is”

in her

Quote: ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun her refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city”

Acts 20:23

chains and afflictions await me

Quote: δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking as if these chains and sufferings were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there”

chains

Quote: δεσμὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the chains that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment”

Acts 20:24

of no word do I consider my life valuable to myself

Quote: οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term word to mean what he might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I do not consider my life to have any value for myself worth speaking of”

to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus

Quote: τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms race and ministry mean the same thing; race is figurative and ministry is literal. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could show how the second term is the literal equivalent of the first. Alternate translation: “to finish my race, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus”

to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus

Quote: τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if the ministry that Jesus gave him were a race he was running. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete my assignment, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus”

to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus

Quote: τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

If you decide to use a plain expression rather than the figurative expression race, you could also use another way to express the emphasis that Paul is conveying by using two similar terms together. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus”

to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus

Quote: τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking about this race and ministry as if they were objects that Jesus gave him and he received. He means that Jesus commanded him to do this ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that the Lord Jesus commanded me to do”

the gospel of the grace of God

Quote: τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the good news that God graciously saves those who believe in Jesus”

Acts 20:25

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

the kingdom

Quote: τὴν βασιλείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by kingdom he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God”

the kingdom

Quote: τὴν βασιλείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king”

will see my face no more

Quote: οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of himself, his face, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more”

Acts 20:26

in the today day

Quote: ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day”

I am innocent from the blood of all

Quote: καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive”

I am innocent from the blood of all

Quote: καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin”

Acts 20:27

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.”

For I did not hold back in order not to declare to you

Quote: οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold back. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you”

to you all the counsel of God

Quote: πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved”

Acts 20:28

the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God

Quote: τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if the believers were a flock of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God”

the church of God, which he obtained through his own blood

Quote: τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their blood when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death”

the church of God, which he obtained through his own blood

Quote: τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns

The word translated obtained means to make something one’s own. The pronoun he may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility.

the church of God, which he obtained through his own blood

Quote: τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective own as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son”

the church of God

Quote: τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here the term church refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God”

Acts 20:29

vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock

Quote: εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a flock of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are vicious wolves. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you”

Acts 20:30

Even from you yourselves

Quote: καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Paul is adding the word yourselves for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “From within your very own group”

men will arise speaking perverted things

Quote: ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

In this context, arise means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things”

perverted things

Quote: διεστραμμένα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth”

in order to draw away the disciples after them

Quote: τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically draw away people after them as they themselves left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follow their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching”

Acts 20:31

I did not stop admonishing

Quote: οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative word stop. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn”

with tears

Quote: μετὰ δακρύων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds tears of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling”

night and day

Quote: νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Paul is using the two parts of a full day, night and day, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time”

night and day

Quote: νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says night and day here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up”

Acts 20:32

to God and to the word of his grace being able

Quote: τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, τῷ δυναμένῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Paul is speaking of the word of God’s grace as if it were a living thing that was able to do the things he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to God who, through the word of his grace, is able”

to the word of his grace

Quote: τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term word to mean the message about God’s grace that Jesus and his apostles shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the message about his grace”

to the word of his grace

Quote: τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the message about how God has graciously saved us”

being able to build you up

Quote: τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the word of God’s grace was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith”

the inheritance

Quote: τὴν κληρονομίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings”

the ones having been sanctified

Quote: τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified”

Acts 20:33

I coveted the silver or gold or clothing of no one

Quote: ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and did not try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you”

I coveted the silver or gold or clothing of no one

Quote: ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase no one and the negative word coveted. Alternate translation: “I served you freely”

the silver or gold

Quote: ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used silver and gold as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money”

the silver or gold or clothing

Quote: ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

In this culture, owning expensive clothing was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth”

Acts 20:34

You yourselves know

Quote: αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Paul is adding the word yourselves for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well”

these hands ministered to my needs

Quote: ταῖς χρείαις μου & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Paul is speaking of his hands as if they were a living thing that ministered to his needs, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses”

and to the ones being with me

Quote: καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me”

Acts 20:35

I showed you all things, that it is necessary

Quote: πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι & δεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary”

all things, that it is necessary

Quote: πάντα & ὅτι & δεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary”

all things

Quote: πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective all as a noun. ULT adds the word things to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of things”

to take hold of the ones being weak

Quote: ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might take hold of a person who was weak to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak”

the words of the Lord Jesus, that he himself said

Quote: τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Paul is adding the word himself for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke”

the words of the Lord Jesus

Quote: τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term words to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus”

he … said, ‘It is more blessed to give than to receive

Quote: εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive”

Acts 20:36

bowing his knees

Quote: θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Paul knelt down as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down”

Acts 20:37

falling upon the neck of Paul

Quote: ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression falling upon means that the Ephesian elders put their arms around Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “embracing Paul” or “putting their arms around Paul”

they were kissing him

Quote: κατεφίλουν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him”

Acts 20:38

the word that he had spoken

Quote: τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made”

they were going to see his face no more

Quote: οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his face, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again”

he had spoken, that they were going to see his face no more

Quote: εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’”

Acts 21

Acts 21 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Acts 21:1–19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20–26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23).

Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.

Acts 21:1

we … we came

Quote: ἡμᾶς & ἤλθομεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun we (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction.

having been parted from them

Quote: ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them”

Cos

Quote: Κῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cos is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea.

Rhodes

Quote: Ῥόδον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Rhodes is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos.

Patara

Quote: Πάταρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Patara is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor.

Acts 21:2

a ship crossing over to Phoenicia

Quote: πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of this ship as if it were a living thing that was crossing over the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia”

Acts 21:3

having left it behind on the port side

Quote: καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression leaving it behind on the port side means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it”

came down to Tyre

Quote: κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that he and his companions came down to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre”

there the ship was unloading {its} cargo

Quote: ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo”

the ship was unloading {its} cargo

Quote: τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of this ship as if it were a living thing that was unloading its own cargo. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo”

Acts 21:4

who were saying to Paul

Quote: οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun who refers to the disciples in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul”

to set foot in Jerusalem

Quote: ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The disciples were using one part of Paul, his foot, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem”

Acts 21:5

when it happened that we had finished the days

Quote: ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they finished. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days”

everyone

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says everyone here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre”

having put down {our} knees on the shore {and} having prayed

Quote: θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray”

Acts 21:6

those

Quote: ἐκεῖνοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun those refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre”

Acts 21:7

we, … we stayed

Quote: ἡμεῖς & ἐμείναμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader.

Ptolemais

Quote: Πτολεμαΐδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Ptolemais is the name of a city that was south of Tyre.

the brothers

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there”

Acts 21:8

from the Seven

Quote: ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by the Seven, he means the seven men who were chosen in 6:5 to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows”

the Evangelist

Quote: τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics

Luke is using the title evangelist to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel”

Acts 21:9

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about the daughters of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

to this one were four daughters

Quote: τούτῳ & ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun this refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters”

Acts 21:10

a certain prophet, Agabus by name, came down

Quote: κατῆλθέν τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain prophet to introduce Agabus as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down”

Agabus

Quote: Ἅγαβος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Agabus is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 11:28.

certain … came down from Judea

Quote: κατῆλθέν τις ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Agabus came down from Judea because that province is higher in elevation than Caesarea. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “arrived from up in Judea”

Acts 21:11

having taken the belt of Paul, having bound his own feet and hands

Quote: ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου, δήσας ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Agabus bound his own feet and hands with Paul’s belt as a symbolic action to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having taken the belt of Paul and bound his own feet and hands to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering”

The Holy Spirit says these things: ‘Thus will the Jews in Jerusalem bind the man of whom is this belt, and they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles

Quote: τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that in this way the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt and that they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles”

the Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Agabus is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews”

into the hands of the Gentiles

Quote: εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hands represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles”

of the Gentiles

Quote: ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Agabus is using the name of a whole group, the Gentiles, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities”

Acts 21:12

the locals

Quote: οἱ ἐντόπιοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective locals as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea”

we … were urging

Quote: παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke means implicitly that this urging included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging”

not to go up to Jerusalem

Quote: τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says to go up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation.

Acts 21:13

What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart

Quote: τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart”

breaking my heart

Quote: συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally breaking his heart. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad”

breaking my heart

Quote: συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In this context, the heart represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad”

not only to be bound

Quote: οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not only for them to bind me”

for the name of the Lord Jesus

Quote: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This could mean: (1) that the name of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to the Lord Jesus” (2) that the name of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of the Lord Jesus”

Acts 21:14

as he was not being persuaded

Quote: μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him”

as … was not being persuaded

Quote: μὴ πειθομένου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem”

Let the will of the Lord happen

Quote: τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May the will of the Lord happen”

Acts 21:15

we went up to Jerusalem

Quote: ἀνεβαίνομεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that he and his traveling companions went up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring in your language to traveling to a higher elevation.

Acts 21:16

a certain Cypriot, an early disciple

Quote: τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain early disciple to introduce Mnason as a new participant in the story. The phrase early disciple introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Cypriot who was one of the first believers”

to Mnason, … Cypriot

Quote: Μνάσωνί & Κυπρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Mnason is the name of a man. The word Cypriot is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in 11:20.

with whom we would be hosted

Quote: παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us”

Acts 21:17

the brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there”

Acts 21:20

they were glorifying … they said to him

Quote: οἱ & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν & αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul”

You see

Quote: θεωρεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul does not physically see these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know”

brother

Quote: ἀδελφέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

James and the elders using the term brother to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another.

they are

Quote: ὑπάρχουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In this instance the pronoun they refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are”

they are all zealous for the law

Quote: πάντες ζηλωταὶ τοῦ νόμου ὑπάρχουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

James and the elders say all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they are very zealous for the law”

Acts 21:21

they have been told about you

Quote: κατηχήθησαν & περὶ σοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

James and the elders mean implicitly that people have been told this about Paul even though it is not true. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even though it is not true, they have been told about you”

they have been told

Quote: κατηχήθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told them”

apostasy from Moses

Quote: ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with Moses, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses”

apostasy from Moses

Quote: ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of apostasy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses”

nor to walk in the customs

Quote: μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish customs were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs”

nor to walk in the customs

Quote: μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the customs, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs”

Acts 21:22

What therefore is it

Quote: τί οὖν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this”

What therefore is it

Quote: τί οὖν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

James and the elders are using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this!”

Acts 21:23

we say

Quote: λέγομεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by we, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

having a vow

Quote: εὐχὴν ἔχοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the term vow in 18:18.

from themselves

Quote: ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read from themselves. That would be indicating that these men made the vow on their own initiative. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “upon themselves.” That would be indicating that the men still needed to fulfill the commitment implicit in the vow to make an offering in the temple at the end of the time during which the conditions of the vow were in effect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT.

Acts 21:24

be purified with them

Quote: ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

James and the elders assume that Paul will know that in order to make an offering at the end of the time of their vows, these men will need to be made ceremonially clean so that they can go into the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “be purified with them so that you can all go to the temple area together”

be purified

Quote: ἁγνίσθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “participate in a purification ceremony”

pay the expenses for them

Quote: δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

James and the elders assume that Paul will know that the expenses at the end of a vow included buying a male and female lamb, a ram, grain, and wine for offerings. They also assume that Paul will know that the Jews considered paying such expenses for those who could not afford them to be an act of great piety. Alternate translation: “piously help them buy the animals and foods they will need for offerings”

so that they will shear {their} heads

Quote: ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The men would cut the hair off their heads to show that he had fulfilled the vows that they had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. See how you translated it in 18:18.

so that they will shear {their} heads

Quote: ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Even though James and the elders are using the future tense, they are actually stating the purpose for which Paul would be purified with these four men and pay their expenses. Use a natural way in your language for expressing a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that they may shear their heads” or “so that they will be able to shear their heads to show that they have fulfilled their vows”

there is nothing in the things they have been told about you

Quote: ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression there is nothing in these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true”

they have been told about you

Quote: κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you”

also keeping the law yourself

Quote: καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

James and the elders are using the word yourself for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully”

Acts 21:25

we sent that they should guard

Quote: ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from”

the idol-sacrificed … the strangled

Quote: τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

James and the elders are using the adjectives idol-sacrificed and strangled as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation”

the idol-sacrificed … the strangled

Quote: τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation”

the strangled

Quote: πνικτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood”

Acts 21:26

the men

Quote: τοὺς ἄνδρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke implicitly means the four men who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow”

having been purified

Quote: ἁγνισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area”

having been purified

Quote: ἁγνισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having participated in a purification ceremony”

the temple

Quote: τὸ ἱερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”

declaring the fulfillment of the days of purification

Quote: διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Luke is using the possessive form the days of purification to mean the days during which the men’s vows were in effect, at the end of which there needed to be a purification ceremony. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified”

declaring the fulfillment of the days of purification

Quote: διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of purification, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified”

of the days of purification

Quote: τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In this case Luke is referring implicitly to a separate purification process from the one the men fulfilled in order to enter the temple area. He means the purification process that came at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of the days of purification at the end of their vows”

until the offering was offered for each one of them

Quote: ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἡ προσφορά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until each one of them offered an offering for himself”

Acts 21:27

the seven days

Quote: αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the seven days that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men”

the Jews from Asia

Quote: οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke implicitly means some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in 20:16. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival”

in the temple

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”

were agitating the whole crowd

Quote: συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making many people in the crowd very agitated”

the … crowd

Quote: τὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the crowd, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival”

they laid {their} hands on him

Quote: ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The expression laid hands on means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him”

Acts 21:28

Men, Israelites

Quote: ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Israelites”

all everywhere

Quote: πάντας πανταχῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The Jews from Asia are saying all and everywhere as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people throughout the empire”

the people and the law and this place

Quote: τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple”

into the temple

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple and that they are accusing Paul of bringing Greeks into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go”

the temple

Quote: τὸ ἱερὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”

Acts 21:29

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid their hands on him, shouting, ‘Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.’”

Trophimus

Quote: Τρόφιμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Trophimus is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in 20:4.

Acts 21:30

the whole city was excited

Quote: ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word city means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited”

the whole city was excited

Quote: ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says the whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited”

the whole city was excited

Quote: ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry”

outside of the temple

Quote: ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard”

the doors were shut

Quote: ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors”

the doors were shut

Quote: ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the gatekeepers shut the doors to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there”

Acts 21:31

And as they were seeking to kill him

Quote: ζητούντων τε αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the mob, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as the mob was seeking to kill Paul”

a report came up to the chiliarch of the cohort

Quote: ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of this report as if they were a living thing that came up to the commander on its own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard”

a report came up to the chiliarch of the cohort

Quote: ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke uses the phrase **came up ** because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard up in the temple fortress”

to the chiliarch of the cohort

Quote: τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A chiliarch was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 1,000 soldiers. A cohort was a large military guard unit. Alternate translation: “to the commander of the military guard”

all Jerusalem was agitated

Quote: ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word Jerusalem means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were agitated”

all Jerusalem was agitated

Quote: ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were very agitated” or “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were rioting”

all Jerusalem was agitated

Quote: ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “something was greatly agitating the people who lived in Jerusalem”

Acts 21:32

who, immediately taking soldiers and centurions, ran down to them

Quote: ὃς ἐξαυτῆς παραλαβὼν στρατιώτας καὶ ἑκατοντάρχας, κατέδραμεν ἐπ’ αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun who refers to the chiliarch (the Roman commander), and the pronoun them refer to the people who were rioting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The commander immediately took soldiers and centurions and ran down to them”

centurions

Quote: ἑκατοντάρχας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A centurion was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. See how you translated it in 10:1. Alternate translation: “their commanding officers”

Acts 21:33

commanded him to be bound with two chains

Quote: ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι ἁλύσεσι δυσί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

These means implicitly that the commander ordered his soldiers to chain Paul to one soldier on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “commanded him to be chained to one soldier on each side of him”

commanded him to be bound

Quote: ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him”

he was asking who he might be and what he had done

Quote: ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking, ‘Who is this? What has he done?’”

he was asking

Quote: ἐπυνθάνετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke means implicitly that the commander was asking the people in the crowd these questions, not that he was asking them of Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was asking the people in the crowd”

Acts 21:34

he, … him

Quote: αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to the commander, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander … Paul”

the certain

Quote: τὸ ἀσφαλὲς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective certain as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth about Paul”

ordered him to be brought

Quote: ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul”

Acts 21:35

he was carried by the soldiers

Quote: βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers carried him”

because of the violence of the crowd

Quote: διὰ τὴν βίαν τοῦ ὄχλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of violence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the crowd was so violent”

Acts 21:36

Take him away

Quote: αἶρε αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a mild way of referring to this in your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Put him to death”

Acts 21:37

being about to be brought into the fortress, Paul

Quote: μέλλων & εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul”

Paul says

Quote: ὁ Παῦλος λέγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said”

Paul says to the chiliarch, “If it is permitted for me to say something to you

Quote: ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him”

Do you know Greek

Quote: Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!”

Acts 21:38

Then are you not the Egyptian having revolted before these days and having led 4,000 men of the Sicarii into the wilderness

Quote: οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be the Egyptian he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!”

of the Sicarii

Quote: τῶν σικαρίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The term Sicarii is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins”

Acts 21:39

a Tarsian

Quote: Ταρσεὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Tarsian is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus.

a citizen of a not undistinguished city

Quote: οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city”

allow me

Quote: ἐπίτρεψόν μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase I ask of you shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me”

Acts 21:40

when he allowed

Quote: ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed”

motioned with {his} hand to the people

Quote: κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak”

Acts 22

Acts 22 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“In the Hebrew language”

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

“The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen.

Acts 22:1

Men, brothers and fathers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine”

Men, brothers and fathers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the word brothers to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word fathers to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old”

hear my defense to you now

Quote: ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself”

Acts 22:2

they granted more quietness

Quote: μᾶλλον παρέσχον ἡσυχίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of quietness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they became even more quiet”

Acts 22:3

born in Tarsus of Cilicia

Quote: γεγεννημένος ἐν Ταρσῷ τῆς Κιλικίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a native of Tarsus of Cilicia”

but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel, instructed

Quote: ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the phrase at the feet to refer to Gamaliel himself by association with the way a student in this culture would sit at the feet of a teacher (that is, on the ground in front of a teacher) while learning from him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but educated in this city by Gamaliel, instructed”

but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel, instructed

Quote: ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could state this using active forms. It may be helpful to begin new sentences here. Alternate translation: “However, Gamaliel educated me in this city. He instructed me”

of Gamaliel

Quote: Γαμαλιήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Gamaliel is the name of the man who was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law at this time. See how you translated his name in 5:34.

according to the strictness

Quote: κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of strictness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the most strict interpretation”

of our fathers

Quote: πατρῴου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestors”

as you all are today

Quote: καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον (1)

Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way that all of you are today”

Acts 22:4

who persecuted this Way unto death

Quote: ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα ἄχρι θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who persecuted this Way to the point of killing those who belonged to it”

who persecuted

Quote: ὃς & ἐδίωξα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Paul is using the pronoun who to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted”

this Way

Quote: ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, this Way represents the people who belonged to the group called the Way. Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to the group called the Way”

this Way

Quote: ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in 9:2.

Acts 22:5

testifies for me

Quote: μαρτυρεῖ μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Paul is speaking politely of the high priest as if it may be assumed that he will willingly testify to what he knows to be true. Use a form in your language that implicitly suggests good will on the part of someone. Alternate translation: “will tell you about me”

the elderhood

Quote: τὸ πρεσβυτέριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to the Sanhedrin by association with the way it was composed of the elders of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin”

the brothers

Quote: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews”

going to bring back bound to Jerusalem … those being there

Quote: ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form bound, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to bind those who were there and bring them back to Jerusalem”

so that they might be punished

Quote: ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that they might receive punishment”

Acts 22:6

And it happened to me that

Quote: ἐγένετο δέ μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose.

Acts 22:7

a voice saying to me, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me

Quote: φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “someone addressing me by name and asking me why I was persecuting him”

a voice saying to me

Quote: φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of this speaker, his voice, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me”

why are you persecuting me

Quote: τί με διώκεις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!”

Acts 22:8

And I answered, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And he said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting

Quote: ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὃν σὺ διώκεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting”

Who are you, Lord

Quote: τίς εἶ, κύριε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was Lord. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir”

Acts 22:9

they did not hear the voice

Quote: τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context the word hear likely means “understand,” since Luke says in 9:7 that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice”

Acts 22:10

But I said, ‘What should I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Arising, go into Damascus, and there it will be told to you about all that has been appointed to you to do

Quote: εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’”

it will be told to you

Quote: σοι λαληθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you”

all that has been appointed

Quote: πάντων ὧν τέτακταί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed”

Acts 22:11

because of the glory of that light

Quote: ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because that light was so bright”

being led by the hand by the ones being with me

Quote: χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the ones being with me leading me by the hand”

I came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “I went”

Acts 22:12

a certain devout man

Quote: τις ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Paul is using the phrase a certain devout man to introduce Ananias as a new participant in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation.

being attested by all the Jews living there

Quote: μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom all the Jews there attested” or “of whom all the Jews there spoke well”

Acts 22:13

said to me, ‘Saul, brother, look up

Quote: εἶπέν μοι, Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ, ἀνάβλεψον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “addressed me as a brother and told me to look up”

Saul, brother

Quote: Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Ananias was using the word brother as a title for Saul. The two men were not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias was already addressing Saul as someone who shared the same faith. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word “brother” is used in 3:17 and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite”

look up

Quote: ἀνάβλεψον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would look up as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility.

look up

Quote: ἀνάβλεψον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression look up can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight”

in the same hour

Quote: αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In the ancient world, an hour was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right at that instant”

And … I looked up to him

Quote: κἀγὼ & ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul means implicitly that when he looked up at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility.

Acts 22:14

And he said, ‘The God of our fathers appointed you to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth

Quote: ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth”

of … fathers

Quote: τῶν πατέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

the Righteous One

Quote: τὸν Δίκαιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Ananias is using the adjective Righteous as a noun to mean a particular person who is righteous. ULT adds the word one to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One who is righteous”

the Righteous One

Quote: τὸν Δίκαιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Ananias is referring to the Messiah by association with the way the Messiah was Righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah”

the voice from his mouth

Quote: φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression the voice from his own mouth contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “his own voice”

Acts 22:15

for you will be a witness for him to all men of what you have seen and heard

Quote: ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους, ὧν ἑώρακας καὶ ἤκουσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation, continuing from the previous verse: “because I would be a witness for him to all men of what I had seen and heard”

to all men

Quote: πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Ananias was using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “to all people”

Acts 22:16

And now, why are you delaying? Arising, be baptized and wash away your sins, calling on his name

Quote: καὶ νῦν τί μέλλεις? ἀναστὰς, βάπτισαι καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He asked me why I was delaying, and he told me to arise and be baptized and wash away my sins, calling on the name of Jesus”

And now

Quote: καὶ νῦν (1)

Here, now does not mean “at this moment”; Ananias is using the term to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So listen”

Arising

Quote: ἀναστὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the term arising means that Ananias wanted Paul to take action, not that he wanted him to stand up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Come on”

be baptized

Quote: βάπτισαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “receive baptism”

and wash away your sins

Quote: καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally wash away his sins. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus releases him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin”

calling on his name

Quote: ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “calling on him”

his name

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By his name, Ananias implicitly means the name of Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus”

Acts 22:17

And it happened to me that

Quote: ἐγένετο δέ μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development.

Acts 22:18

And I saw him saying to me, ‘Hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem, because they will not accept your testimony about me

Quote: καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι, σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει ἐξ Ἰερουσαλήμ, διότι οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I saw him telling me to hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem because they would not accept my testimony about him”

him

Quote: αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”

Hurry and go away in haste

Quote: σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The expressions Hurry and in haste mean similar things. Jesus was using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Go away as fast as you can”

Acts 22:19

And I said, ‘Lord, they themselves know that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues the ones believing in you

Quote: κἀγὼ εἶπον, Κύριε, αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται ὅτι ἐγὼ ἤμην φυλακίζων καὶ δέρων κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς, τοὺς πιστεύοντας ἐπὶ σέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I told the Lord that they themselves knew that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in him”

they themselves know

Quote: αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns they themselves refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews here in Jerusalem who do not believe in you know”

they themselves know

Quote: αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Paul is adding the word themselves for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “they know very well”

Acts 22:20

And when the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled, I myself was also standing by and agreeing and guarding the outer garments of the ones killing him

Quote: καὶ ὅτε ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἤμην ἐφεστὼς, καὶ συνευδοκῶν, καὶ φυλάσσων τὰ ἱμάτια τῶν ἀναιρούντων αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I told him that when the blood of Stephen his witness was spilled, I myself was also standing by and agreeing and guarding the outer garments of the ones killing him”

the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled

Quote: ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, recall from chapter 7 that it was the enemies of Stephen. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness spilled his blood”

the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled

Quote: ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to Stephen’s death by association with the way his blood was spilled when his enemies killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness killed him”

Acts 22:21

But he said to me, ‘Go, because I will send you far away to the Gentiles

Quote: καὶ εἶπεν πρός με, πορεύου, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰς ἔθνη μακρὰν ἐξαποστελῶ σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he told me to go because he would send me far away to the Gentiles”

Acts 22:22

this word

Quote: τούτου τοῦ λόγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific word “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’” (2) that the term word means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul says this”

they lifted up their voice, saying

Quote: ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally lifted up its voice. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted”

their voice

Quote: τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν (1)

If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of “lifting up a voice” but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”

Remove such a one from the earth

Quote: αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The crowd is referring to Paul’s death by association with the way they would remove him from the earth if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one”

it was not right for him to live

Quote: οὐ & καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The crowd meant implicitly that it was not right for Paul to live even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us”

Acts 22:23

casting off {their} outer garments

Quote: ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him”

throwing dust into the air

Quote: κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were throwing dust into the air to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air”

Acts 22:24

ordered him to be brought

Quote: ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him”

the fortress

Quote: τὴν παρεμβολήν (1)

This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in 21:34.

commanding him to be examined by scourges

Quote: εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges”

commanding him to be examined by scourges

Quote: εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The commander did not want scourges to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, scourges, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him”

by scourges

Quote: μάστιξιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term scourges describes leathern thongs that had small pieces of metal attached to them to inflict more damage. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips”

Acts 22:25

they stretched … out

Quote: προέτειναν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the soldiers who were going to whip Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers”

Paul said to the centurion standing by, “If it is lawful for you to scourge a man Roman and uncondemned

Quote: εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἑκατόνταρχον ὁ Παῦλος, εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the centurion who was standing by whether it was lawful for him and his soliders to scourge a man who was a Roman and had not been condemned.”

If it is lawful for you to scourge a man Roman and uncondemned

Quote: εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul is using the question form to challenge the right of the centurion and his soldiers to whip him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman citizen and who is uncondemned!”

a man Roman and uncondemned

Quote: ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In this context, the term Roman implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “a man who is a Roman citizen and who has not been condemned”

Acts 22:26

What are you about to do

Quote: τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The centurion is using the question form to warn the commander that he should not have Paul whipped. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing this!”

What are you about to do

Quote: τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!”

a Roman

Quote: Ῥωμαῖός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

As in the previous verse, here the term Roman implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen”

Acts 22:27

to him, “… he

Quote: αὐτῷ & ὁ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns them, him, and he refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he”

Acts 22:28

I bought this citizenship with a large sum of money

Quote: ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The commander is saying implicitly that he does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen”

I bought this citizenship with a large sum of money

Quote: ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of citizenship, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money”

I … indeed was born

Quote: ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen”

I … indeed was born

Quote: ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father”

Acts 22:29

was afraid

Quote: ἐφοβήθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the commander was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him”

Acts 22:30

the certain

Quote: τὸ ἀσφαλὲς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective certain as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth”

he released him

Quote: ἔλυσεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This means implicitly not that the commander released Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul”

Acts 23

Acts 23 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: INVALID bible/other/raise and reward, prize, deserve)

“Called a curse”

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 23:1

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the word brothers to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites”

in all good conscience

Quote: πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law”

Acts 23:2

Ananias

Quote: Ἁνανίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

Ananias is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in 5:1 and 9:10.

to strike his mouth

Quote: τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his mouth that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said”

Acts 23:3

you whitewashed wall

Quote: τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is referring to the way a wall can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that, in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good”

And do you sit judging me by the law and, acting contrary to the law, command me to be struck

Quote: καὶ σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul is using the question form to challenge Ananias for what he has done. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not sit judging me by the law while acting contrary to the law by commanding me to be struck!”

command me to be struck

Quote: κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “command someone to strike me”

Acts 23:4

Are you insulting the high priest of God

Quote: τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The men standing by Paul are using the question form to rebuke him for saying what he said. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not insult the high priest of God!”

Acts 23:5

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term brothers to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen”

For it is written, ‘You shall not speak evil of a ruler of your people

Quote: γέγραπται γὰρ, ὅτι ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For it is written that we should not speak evil of a ruler of our people”

For it is written

Quote: γέγραπται γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law”

You shall not speak evil of a ruler of your people

Quote: ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must not speak evil of a ruler of your people”

Acts 23:6

one part

Quote: τὸ ἓν μέρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one part of the council”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term brothers to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My kinsmen”

a son of Pharisees

Quote: υἱὸς Φαρισαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

By son, Paul means both that he is the literal son of a Pharisee and that he is the descendant of a line of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”

the hope and resurrection

Quote: ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word resurrection describes what the Pharisees had hope for. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “the hope of the resurrection”

the hope and resurrection of the dead

Quote: ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the hope that God will make the dead alive again”

of the dead

Quote: νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died”

I am being judged

Quote: ἐγὼ κρίνομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me”

Acts 23:8

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke uses the word For to introduce background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

there is no resurrection, nor angels or spirits

Quote: μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there is no resurrection and that there are no angels and no spirits”

both

Quote: τὰ ἀμφότερα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By both, Luke means implicitly that Pharisees believe in (1) the resurrection and (2) angels and spirits. You could indicate this explicitly if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “both that there is a resurrection and that there are angels and spirits”

Acts 23:9

arising

Quote: ἀναστάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

By arising (that is, standing up), these Pharisees were indicating that they had something important to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that they had something important to say”

And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel

Quote: εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact

These Pharisees are speaking as if what they are saying is a hypothetical possibility, but they believe that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel”

And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel

Quote: εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

These Pharisees assume that the Sadducees will understand that they mean this spirit or angel spoke to Paul when he had the vision in the Jerusalem temple that he described in 22:17–21. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel, when he had his vision in Jerusalem”

And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel

Quote: εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.”

Acts 23:10

Paul be torn apart by them

Quote: διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart”

lest Paul be torn apart by them

Quote: μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm”

Acts 23:11

on the following night

Quote: τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This expression indicates the night after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed”

the Lord

Quote: ὁ Κύριος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”

to testify in Rome

Quote: εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus assumes that Paul will know that he means Paul will testify about him in Rome. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to testify about me in Rome”

Acts 23:12

the Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews”

cursed themselves

Quote: ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the curse was, “May God do so to us if we eat or drink until we have killed Paul,” that is, “May God kill us.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “asked God to kill them if they did not do what they swore to do”

saying neither to eat nor to drink until they had killed Paul

Quote: λέγοντες μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωσιν τὸν Παῦλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘We will neither eat or drink until we have killed Paul’”

Acts 23:14

We have cursed ourselves with a curse

Quote: ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression cursed ourselves with a curse contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “cursed ourselves”

to eat nothing

Quote: μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Since the men actually swore that they would eat or drink nothing, they are using one part of their oath to represent all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat and drink nothing”

Acts 23:15

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

appear

Quote: ἐμφανίσατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear”

Acts 23:16

hearing the ambush

Quote: ἀκούσας & τὴν ἐνέδραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the ambush. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush”

the son of the sister of Paul

Quote: ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Luke does not tell us whether this sister was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or “the nephew of Paul”

Acts 23:17

Take

Quote: ἄπαγε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take”

Acts 23:18

taking him, he brought him

Quote: ὁ & παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun he refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him”

says

Quote: φησίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”

Acts 23:19

So … taking hold of his hand

Quote: ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The chiliarch taking hold of the hand of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a private location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him”

Acts 23:20

The Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, The Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Certain Jews”

Acts 23:21

may you not be persuaded by them

Quote: σὺ & μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you”

the promise from you

Quote: τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

By the word promise, Paul’s nephew is referring to the commander agreeing to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin the next day and actually bringing him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin”

Acts 23:22

commanding him to tell no one that “you have reported these things to me

Quote: παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’”

Acts 23:23

200 spearmen

Quote: δεξιολάβους διακοσίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers

Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears”

the third hour of the night

Quote: τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In your translation, you may wish to express this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock this evening”

Acts 23:24

and to provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor

Quote: κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to continue and finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor”

they may bring him safely

Quote: διασώσωσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the soldiers, horsemen, and spearmen described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these troops may bring him safely”

Felix

Quote: Φήλικα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Felix is the name of the man who was the Roman governor of Judea at this time.

Acts 23:25

writing a letter

Quote: γράψας ἐπιστολὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke means implicitly that the commander gave the instructions described in the previous two verses by “summoning” two centurions and writing the letter quoted in verses 26–30. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He also wrote a letter”

Acts 23:26

Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix

Quote: Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

The commander begins this letter by speaking about himself and about the person to whom he is writing in the third person. That was the convention in this culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first and second persons to translate this. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to you, the most excellent Governor Felix”

Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix: Greetings

Quote: Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

As was also the convention in this culture, the letter-writer leaves it unstated but understood that he is writing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply those words. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix”

Claudius Lysias

Quote: Κλαύδιος Λυσίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Claudius Lysias are the name of the commander.

to the most excellent Governor Felix

Quote: τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

The expression most excellent was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to the Honorable Governor Felix”

Acts 23:27

This man, having been seized by the Jews and about to be killed by them, … I rescued

Quote: τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, καὶ μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν & ἐξειλάμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Learning that the Jews had seized this man and that they were about to kill him … I rescued him”

the Jews

Quote: τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The commander is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews”

a Roman

Quote: Ῥωμαῖός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the term Roman implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen”

Acts 23:28

I took him down

Quote: κατήγαγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

The commander says that he took Paul ** down** to the Sanhedrin because he brought him down the steps from the Roman fortress to the temple courtyard. It may not be necessary to reproduce this detail in your translation. Alternate translation: “I brought him”

Acts 23:29

whom I found being accused about questions of their law but having no accusation worthy of death or chains

Quote: ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν; μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I found that the Jews were accusing him about questions of their law, but they were not accusing him of anything worthy of death or chains”

of death or chains

Quote: θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The commander is using the word death to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used chains to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “of being put to death or being put in prison”

Acts 23:30

when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me

Quote: μηνυθείσης & μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man”

Acts 23:31

according to the thing having been commanded to them

Quote: κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do”

Antipatris

Quote: τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Antipatris is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea.

Acts 23:32

they returned … him

Quote: αὐτῷ, ὑπέστρεψαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, the soldiers returned”

Acts 23:33

who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him

Quote: οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun who refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him”

Acts 23:34

having asked what province he was from

Quote: ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’”

Acts 23:35

commanding him to be guarded

Quote: κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him”

Acts 24

Acts 24 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Respect

Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2–4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Acts 24:1

a certain orator, Tertullus

Quote: ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a certain orator to introduce Tertullus as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation.

a … orator

Quote: ῥήτορος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this context, the term orator means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer”

certain … Tertullus

Quote: Τερτύλλου τινός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Tertullus is the name of a man.

came down

Quote: κατέβη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that these men came down to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language.

Acts 24:2

when he had been summoned

Quote: κληθέντος & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul”

to accuse him

Quote: κατηγορεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul”

As we are obtaining

Quote: τυγχάνοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

you, … your

Quote: σοῦ & σῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here the words you and your refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your”

for this people

Quote: τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by this people he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people”

Acts 24:3

in every way … everywhere, … all

Quote: πάντῃ & πανταχοῦ & πάσης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation.

most excellent Felix

Quote: κράτιστε Φῆλιξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

The expression most excellent was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in Acts 23:26. Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix”

with all thankfulness

Quote: μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word thankfulness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very gratefully”

Acts 24:4

to us

Quote: ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Tertullus means himself and the Jewish leaders on whose behalf he is speaking. He does not mean Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking. So use the exclusive form of “us” in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

briefly in your fairness

Quote: συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fairness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “briefly, knowing that you will judge our case fairly”

Acts 24:5

a pest

Quote: λοιμὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Tertullus is speaking as if Paul was literally spreading disease. He means that Paul is causing trouble. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a troublemaker”

among all the Jews throughout the world

Quote: πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Tertullus says this as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain this overstatement in your translation.

of the Nazarenes

Quote: τῶν Ναζωραίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

In this context, the word Nazarenes is a name that people used at this time to describe believers in Jesus. Jesus himself was known as a Nazarene because he came from the town of Nazareth. See how you translated the same word in 2:22, where it has that meaning.

Acts 24:6

whom also we arrested

Quote: ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Tertullus is making the case that Paul is a criminal, but he is leaving it up to Felix to decide what Paul’s punishment should be, so he is deliberately breaking off this sentence here. If this might be unclear to your readers, you could indicate his meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “whom we also arrested, and who deserves to be punished, but we will leave it to you to decide his punishment.”

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote.

Acts 24:8

from whom

Quote: παρ’ οὗ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun whom refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “From him”

Acts 24:9

the Jews

Quote: οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who had come to Caesarea to accuse Paul”

Acts 24:11

it is not more than 12 days for me from when

Quote: οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it was only 12 days ago that”

Acts 24:12

they found

Quote: εὗρόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jews who are accusing me found”

Acts 24:14

the Way

Quote: τὴν Ὁδὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in 9:2.

the things written in the Prophets

Quote: τοῖς ἐν τοῖς προφήταις γεγραμμένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the prophets wrote”

the Prophets

Quote: τοῖς προφήταις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Prophets is the name of a section of the Bible that contains the books in which the prophets recorded the messages that God gave them. Alternate translation: “the books that the prophets wrote”

Acts 24:15

these

Quote: οὗτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun these refers to the Jewish leaders who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “my accusers”

that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and the unrighteous

Quote: ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that God will make both the righteous and the unrighteous alive again after they have died”

of both the righteous and the unrighteous

Quote: δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjectives righteous and unrighteous as nouns to mean different groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of both people who have done what is right and people who have not done what is right”

Acts 24:16

In this

Quote: ἐν τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun this refers to what Paul has just said in verses 14 and 15 about what he believes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Because I believe these things,”

before God

Quote: πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God”

men

Quote: τοὺς ἀνθρώπους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people”

Acts 24:17

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Paul is using the word translated Now to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose.

I came

Quote: παρεγενόμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

to my nation

Quote: εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish nation live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live”

bringing alms and offerings

Quote: ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων & καὶ προσφοράς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By alms Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By offerings he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period”

Acts 24:18

in which

Quote: ἐν αἷς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun which refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, ending verse 17 with a period. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,”

Acts 24:19

certain Jews from Asia—who ought to be present

Quote: τινὲς & ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει & παρεῖναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present”

Acts 24:20

let these themselves say

Quote: αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may these themselves say” or “these themselves should say”

these themselves

Quote: αὐτοὶ οὗτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

These pronouns refer to the Jewish leaders who have come to Caesarea to accuse Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jewish leaders who have come here”

when I stood before the Sanhedrin

Quote: στάντος μου ἐπὶ τοῦ Συνεδρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to what he said to the Sanhedrin to defend himself by association with the way he stood in front of the council as he said it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I defended myself at a meeting of the Sanhedrin”

Acts 24:21

other} than regarding this one utterance that I shouted out standing among them, ‘Concerning the resurrection of the dead I am being judged by you today

Quote: ἢ περὶ μιᾶς ταύτης φωνῆς, ἧς ἐκέκραξα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἑστὼς, ὅτι περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “other than that when I was standing among them, I shouted that I was being judged by them that day concerning the resurrection of the dead”

Concerning the resurrection of the dead

Quote: περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because I believe that God will make those who have died alive again,”

I am being judged by you

Quote: ἐγὼ κρίνομαι & ἐφ’ ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today”

Acts 24:22

may come down

Quote: καταβῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Felix says may come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation.

Acts 24:23

to forbid none

Quote: μηδένα κωλύειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle none and the negative verb forbid. Alternate translation: “to allow all”

of his own

Quote: τῶν ἰδίων αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By his own, Luke implicitly means Paul’s own friends. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of his friends”

Acts 24:24

Drusilla

Quote: Δρουσίλλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Drusilla is the name of a woman.

being a Jewess

Quote: οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Jewess is the name for a woman who is Jewish. Alternate translation: “who was a Jewish woman”

Acts 24:25

he

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul”

Acts 24:26

money would be given to him by Paul

Quote: χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul would give him money”

Acts 24:27

two years being fulfilled

Quote: διετίας & πληρωθείσης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is describing this time period in the way in which his culture and language spoke about time. The expression can refer to any period of time between one year and two years in length. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “after a couple of years”

Porcius Festus

Quote: Πόρκιον Φῆστον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Porcius Festus are the names of a man.

with the Jews

Quote: τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who were hostile to Paul”

bound

Quote: δεδεμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in bonds”

bound

Quote: δεδεμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one thing that the Romans did to keep Paul prisoner to represent all of what they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a prisoner”

Acts 25

Acts 25 General Notes

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Favor

This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: favor, favorable, favoritism)

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens; others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.

Acts 25:1

Now

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

having set foot

Quote: ἐπιβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of Festus, his foot, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Judea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having arrived”

in the province

Quote: τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the province, Luke implicitly means the province of Judea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in Judea”

went up from Caesarea to Jerusalem

Quote: ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that Festus went up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation.

Acts 25:2

the first of the Jews

Quote: οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, first has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most prominent of the Jews”

Acts 25:3

him, … him … him

Quote: αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul”

making an ambush to kill him along the way

Quote: ἐνέδραν ποιοῦντες ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

It was the Jewish leaders who were secretly making an ambush. This was not part of what they were requesting Festus to do. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But the Jewish leaders were secretly preparing an ambush to kill Paul along the way”

Acts 25:4

Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea but that he himself was about to depart soon

Quote: ὁ & Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’”

Paul was being held

Quote: τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was holding Paul”

to depart

Quote: ἐκπορεύεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Festus means implicitly that he is about to depart from Jerusalem and travel to Caesarea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to depart Jerusalem for Caesarea”

Acts 25:5

the powerful among you

Quote: οἱ & ἐν ὑμῖν & δυνατοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Festus is using the adjective powerful as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, powerful means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter”

having come down together

Quote: συνκαταβάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Festus says come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation.

let them accuse him

Quote: κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they accuse him” or “they should accuse him”

Acts 25:6

not more than eight or ten days

Quote: ἡμέρας, οὐ πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “less than eight or ten days”

having sat in the judgment seat

Quote: καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Festus sat in the judgment seat as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul”

Paul to be brought

Quote: τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his soldiers to bring Paul to him”

Acts 25:7

he … him

Quote: αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns he and him refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him”

many and serious charges

Quote: πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα (1)

It may be more natural in your language not to use the word and between these adjectives. Alternate translation: “many serious charges” or “many charges that were all serious”

Acts 25:8

against Caesar

Quote: εἰς Καίσαρά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using the leader of the Roman government to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “against the Roman government”

Acts 25:9

wanting to lay down a favor for the Jews

Quote: θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who were opposing Paul”

to lay down a favor for the Jews

Quote: τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the Festus wanted to lay down a favor physically for the Jewish leaders, as if they would pick it up and leave something else for him in its place. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to do a favor for the Jewish leaders that they would later return”

answering Paul, said

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς τῷ Παύλῳ εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the words answering and said mean that Festus responded to Paul. Alternate translation: “Festus responded to Paul”

having gone up to Jerusalem

Quote: εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Festus says gone up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation.

to Jerusalem, to be judged before me there about these things

Quote: εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα & ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things”

Acts 25:10

I am standing before the judgment seat of Caesar

Quote: ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to Caesar’s authority to judge him by association with the judgment seat where Caesar sat when he judged cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by Caesar”

I am standing before the judgment seat of Caesar

Quote: ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using Caesar, the leader of the Roman government, to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by the Roman government”

where it is necessary for me to be judged

Quote: οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where it is necessary for someone to judge me”; or, if you translated the previous phrase as “I am being judged by the Roman government”: “which is the authority that ought to judge me”

Acts 25:11

I do not refuse to die

Quote: οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb refuse. Alternate translation: “I am willing to die”

Acts 25:12

the council

Quote: τοῦ συμβουλίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by council here, he does not mean the Jewish Sanhedrin. He means the group of officials who advised Festus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”

to Caesar you will go

Quote: ἐπὶ Καίσαρα πορεύσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Festus is using a future statement to give a ruling in Paul’s case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a ruling. Alternate translation: “so I grant your appeal and I am going to send you to Caesar for judgment”

Acts 25:13

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

King Agrippa and Bernice

Quote: Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Agrippa is the name of a man. He ruled a few territories in the area where Festus was the Roman governor. The word Bernice is the name a woman. She was the sister of King Agrippa.

having come down to Caesarea

Quote: κατήντησαν εἰς Καισάρειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke speaks of Agrippa and Bernice having come down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem, where they lived. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation.

Acts 25:14

A certain man has been left a prisoner by Felix

Quote: ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Felix has left a certain man a prisoner”

A certain man has been left a prisoner by Felix

Quote: ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Festus is using the phrase A certain man to introduce Paul to Agrippa and Bernice. If your language has its own way of introducing people and their stories, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There is a man named Paul whom Felix left as a prisoner”

Acts 25:15

requesting a judgment against him

Quote: αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requesting that I judge him”

Acts 25:16

the one being accused

Quote: ὁ κατηγορούμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one against whom people are making accusations”

may have the accusers by face

Quote: κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word face represents the presence of a person by association with the way people can see the face of someone who is present. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “may meet face to face with the accusers”

Acts 25:17

when they had come together

Quote: συνελθόντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the chief priests and the elders of the Jews, whom Festus mentioned in verse 15. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the chief priests and the elders of the Jews had come together”

having sat in the judgment seat

Quote: καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Festus sat in the judgment seat as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that I was ready to act as the judge in this case”

I commanded the man to be brought

Quote: ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I commanded soldiers to bring the man”

Acts 25:19

their own religion

Quote: τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of religion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their religious beliefs” or “their beliefs about God and spiritual things”

Acts 25:20

asked if he might be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things

Quote: ἔλεγον εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked, ‘Might you be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things?’”

be judged

Quote: κρίνεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have me judge him”

Acts 25:21

when Paul appealed that he be kept

Quote: τοῦ & Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when Paul asked that I keep him”

of the August one

Quote: τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “of His Majesty the Emperor”

I commanded him to be kept

Quote: ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I commanded the guards to keep him in custody”

Acts 25:22

I myself was also wanting to hear this man

Quote: ἐβουλόμην καὶ αὐτὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀκοῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Agrippa is using the reflexive pronoun myself for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I too would certainly want to hear this man”

he says

Quote: φησίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “he said”

Acts 25:23

Paul was brought

Quote: ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul”

Acts 25:24

all the men

Quote: πάντες οἱ & ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are present, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you”

with us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Festus means himself and King Agrippa but not the rest of the crowd to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

the whole multitude of the Jews petitioned me

Quote: ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐνέτυχόν μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Festus says the whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the multitude of the Jews petitioned me urgently”

shouting that he ought not to live any longer

Quote: βοῶντες μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “shouting, ‘He ought not to live any longer!’”

he ought not to live any longer

Quote: μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he ought not to live no longer.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately”

Acts 25:25

the August one

Quote: τὸν Σεβαστὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to His Majesty The Empeor”

Acts 25:26

to the lord

Quote: τῷ κυρίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Festus is referring to the emperor by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to our lord the emperor”

you, … you

Quote: ὑμῶν & σοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Here the first instance of you is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second you is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 25:27

it seems unreasonable to me, sending a prisoner and not to signify

Quote: ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adjective unreasonable. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state”

Acts 26

Acts 26 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22)

Paul told King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and said that the governor should not punish him for that.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Acts 26:1

It is permitted to you

Quote: ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I permit you”

stretching out {his} hand

Quote: ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This could mean: (1) that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (2) that as Paul spoke, he used hand gestures to emphasize the points he was making. Alternate translation: “gesturing with his hand as he spoke”

Acts 26:2

of which I am accused by the Jews

Quote: ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Jews accuse me of doing”

the Jews

Quote: Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish leaders”

Acts 26:3

in all the customs and controversies among the Jews

Quote: πάντων τῶν κατὰ Ἰουδαίους, ἐθῶν τε καὶ ζητημάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in a wide range of customs and controversies among the Jews”

Acts 26:4

all the Jews know

Quote: ἴσασι πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jews know very well”

in my nation and in Jerusalem

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου ἔν τε Ἱεροσολύμοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

By nation, Paul most likely means by association the people of his nation, that is, the Jews. Alternate translation: “among the Jews, especially in the city of Jerusalem”

Acts 26:5

of our religion

Quote: τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By our, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 26:6

now

Quote: νῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Paul is using the word translated Now to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose.

I stand here being judged

Quote: ἕστηκα κρινόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me”

because of hope of the promise made to our fathers by God

Quote: ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because I hope in the promise made to our fathers by God”

of the promise made to our fathers by God

Quote: τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the promise that God made to our fathers”

of the promise made to our fathers by God

Quote: τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Since Paul explains in verse 8 that the promise for which he has hope is the resurrection from the dead, here you do not need to explain further what Paul means.

our fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

our fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By our, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Acts 26:7

our 12 tribes

Quote: τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to the people of Israel by association with the way that nation was historically composed of 12 tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our Jewish people”

our 12 tribes

Quote: τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By our, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

serving in earnestness

Quote: ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ & λατρεῦον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of earnestness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly”

night and day

Quote: νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Paul is using the two parts of a full day, night and day, to refer to continuous activity throughout a full day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually” or, if you translated serving in earnestness as “serving earnestly”: “and continually”

I am being accused by the Jews

Quote: ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews are accusing me”

by the Jews

Quote: ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by these Jewish leaders”

Acts 26:8

Why is it judged unbelievable among you if God raises the dead

Quote: τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul is using the question form to challenge the Jewish leaders who are accusing him. Many of them are Pharisees who believe that God does raise the dead, and yet they do not believe that God raised Jesus from the dead. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “By accusing me, you are acting as if you do not believe that God raises the dead!”

among you

Quote: παρ’ ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

While to this point Paul has used the word you in the singular to refer to Agrippa, here he uses it in the plural to refer to the Jewish leaders who are present. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

if God raises the dead

Quote: εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact

Paul is speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility, but he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “that God raises the dead”

raises the dead

Quote: νεκροὺς ἐγείρει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, raises the dead is an idiom that refers to making someone who has died alive again. Alternate translation: “God makes the dead alive again”

the dead

Quote: νεκροὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died”

Acts 26:9

the name of Jesus

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

While in such contexts the word name often represents the person who has that name, Paul is describing a time when he did not believe that Jesus was still alive. So here the word name seems to represent the reputation and influence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the reputation and influence of Jesus”

Acts 26:10

of the saints

Quote: τῶν ἁγίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is using the term saints by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in 9:33. Alternate translation: “of the believers in Jesus”

when they were being executed

Quote: ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his vote in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death”

when they were being executed

Quote: ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them”

I cast my vote against them

Quote: κατήνεγκα ψῆφον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that Paul cast his vote as a member of the Sanhedrin. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “as a member of the Sanhedrin, I cast my vote against them”

Acts 26:11

punishing them in all the synagogues

Quote: κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς & τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them”

Acts 26:12

with authority and a commission

Quote: μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word authority tells what kind of commission the chief priests gave Paul. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “with an authoritative commission”

Acts 26:14

I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me? It is hard for you to kick against a goad

Quote: ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, calling me twice by name, asking me why I was persecuting him, and telling me it was hard for me to kick against a goad.”

I heard a voice speaking to me

Quote: ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Paul is speaking of this voice as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “I heard someone saying to me”

why are you persecuting me

Quote: τί με διώκεις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!”

It is hard for you to kick against a goad

Quote: σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The voice is speaking as if Paul were literally kicking against a goad, that is, a sharp object that people use to prod an animal. The voice means that by opposing Jesus and persecuting believers, Paul is hurting himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are hurting yourself by what you are doing”

Acts 26:15

And I said, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And the Lord said, ‘I am Jesus, whom you are persecuting

Quote: ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα, τίς εἶ, κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς, ὃν σὺ διώκεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I asked the Lord who he was, and the Lord said that he was Jesus, whom I was persecuting”

Who are you, Lord

Quote: τίς εἶ, κύριε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

When Paul replied to the voice, he was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was Lord. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, in your translation you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir”

the Lord said

Quote: ὁ & Κύριος εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said”

Acts 26:16

But get up and stand on your feet, because for this I have appeared to you, to appoint you a servant and a witness both of the things in which you have seen me and of the things in which I will be shown to you

Quote: ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὤφθην σοι, προχειρίσασθαί σε ὑπηρέτην καὶ μάρτυρα, ὧν τε εἶδές με ὧν τε ὀφθήσομαί σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He told me to get up and stand on my feet, because for this he had appeared to me, to appoint me a servant and a witness both of the things in which I had seen him and of the things in which he would be shown to me”

get up and stand on your feet

Quote: ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that the expression get up and stand on your feet contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “stand up”

I will be shown to you

Quote: ὀφθήσομαί σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to you”

Acts 26:17

rescuing you from the people and from the Gentiles, to whom I am sending you

Quote: ἐξαιρούμενός σε ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐθνῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω σε, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He told me that he would rescue me from the peoples and from the Gentiles, to whom he was sending me”

the people

Quote: τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the people, Jesus means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people”

Acts 26:18

to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in me

Quote: ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς, καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν, τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ κλῆρον ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in him”

to open their eyes to turn

Quote: ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to understand the truth about him as if Paul would literally open the eyes of these people. Alternate translation: “to help them understand the truth about me so that they will turn”

to turn from darkness to light

Quote: ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to stop doing what is wrong and to start obeying God as if the Paul would be literally helping these people stop directing their attention to darkness and start directing it to light. Alternate translation: “so that they will stop doing what is wrong and start obeying God”

and from the authority of Satan to God

Quote: καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By authority, Jesus implicitly means the control that Satan has over people who are under his authority. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and no longer have Satan control them but have God control them”

for them to receive forgiveness of sins and

Quote: τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them”

an inheritance among

Quote: κλῆρον ἐν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus is speaking of the blessings that he gives to those who believe in him as if they were an inheritance such as children receive from their parents. Alternate translation: “the blessings that I give to”

the ones having been sanctified by faith in me

Quote: τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom I sanctify because they have faith in me”

Acts 26:19

I was not disobedient

Quote: οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adjective disobedient. Alternate translation: “I was obedient”

to the heavenly vision

Quote: τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to Jesus by association with the way Jesus spoke to him in this vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus, who spoke to me from heaven in this vision”

Acts 26:20

turn to God

Quote: ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if he declared that people should physically turn to God. He means that he proclaimed they should stop living in one way and begin to live in another way. Alternate translation: “start obeying God”

doing deeds worthy of repentance

Quote: ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “doing deeds that showed that they had truly repented”

Acts 26:21

the Jews

Quote: Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who opposed me”

Acts 26:22

to both small and great

Quote: μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Paul is referring to people of every kind by naming two extremes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to people of every kind”

nothing except the things that

Quote: οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke nothing and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that”

Acts 26:23

if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim light

Quote: εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Paul could be saying that this is what Moses and the prophets said about the Messiah. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They addressed the question as to whether the Christ would be a sufferer, as to whether he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim” or see next note for another possibility.

if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim light

Quote: εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact

Paul could be speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility even though he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now since the Christ was a sufferer, since he was the first from the resurrection of the dead, then he was going to proclaim light”

the first from the resurrection of the dead

Quote: πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the first person whom God made alive again after he died”

of the dead

Quote: νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who have died”

he, … was going to proclaim light

Quote: φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is saying that the truth that Jesus proclaimed about God was like a light that allowed people to see. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was going to proclaim the truth about God”

to the people

Quote: τῷ & λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the people, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people”

Acts 26:24

Festus says

Quote: ὁ Φῆστος & φησιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said”

Great learning is turning you to insanity

Quote: τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Festus is speaking of learning as if it were a living thing that was turning Paul from sanity to insanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have become insane from learning so much”

Acts 26:25

I am not insane

Quote: οὐ μαίνομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adjective insane. Alternate translation: “I am completely sane”

most excellent Festus

Quote: κράτιστε Φῆστε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

The expression most excellent was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in Acts 23:26. Alternate translation: “Honorable Governor Festus”

words of truth and of sanity

Quote: ἀληθείας καὶ σωφροσύνης ῥήματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the character of the words he is speaking. Alternate translation: “words that are true and sane”

Acts 26:26

to whom indeed, speaking boldly, I am talking

Quote: πρὸς ὃν καὶ παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness

Paul recognizes that he is being very outspoken in response to King Agrippa’s invitation to speak for himself, so he implicitly apologizes. In your translation, you could use a comparable expression from your language and culture. Alternate translation: “and I hope that he will pardon me for speaking so boldly as I talk to him”

I am not persuaded at all that any of these things eludes him

Quote: λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that not any of these things eludes him.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him”

not … this has … been done in a corner

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner”

not … this has … been done in a corner

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly”

in a corner

Quote: ἐν γωνίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if Jesus might have done things secretly, as if he had done them in a corner of a room where no one could see him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “secretly”

Acts 26:27

Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa

Quote: πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Paul asks this question to challenge King Agrippa to recognize that if he believes what the prophets wrote, then he should believe that Jesus rose from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should believe what I am saying about Jesus since you believe the prophets, King Agrippa.”

Acts 26:28

In little are you persuading me to make me a Christian

Quote: ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Agrippa is using the question form to challenge Paul. He is asserting that what Paul has said so far is not sufficiently persuasive. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. The term little could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian with so little proof.” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian in such a short time.”

Acts 26:29

either in little or in much

Quote: καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν μεγάλῳ (1)

The term little could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “whether what I have said is enough or whether you need more proof” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “whether it takes a short time or a long time”

without these chains

Quote: παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the chains that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without being imprisoned”

Acts 26:31

This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains

Quote: οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The king and governor are referring to a penalty of death by association with death itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to receive the death penalty or to be kept in chains”

of chains

Quote: δεσμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

These people who heard Paul speak are using one aspect of imprisonment, the chains that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of being imprisoned”

Acts 26:32

This man was able to have been released

Quote: ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You could have released this man”

Acts 27

Acts 27 General Notes

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Sailing

People who lived near the sea traveled by boats powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.

Trust

Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailors and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: trust, trusted, trustworthy, trustworthiness)

Paul breaks bread

Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.

Acts 27:1

it was decided for us to sail

Quote: ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities decided that we should sail”

it was decided for us to sail

Quote: ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says us because he joined Paul at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this.

for us

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

As the General Notes to this chapter explain, here and in several other places Luke says “we,” us, and “our” to mean himself and others who were traveling with him, but not his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction.

to a centurion, Julius by name

Quote: ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Luke is using the phrase a centurion to introduce Julius as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation.

Julius

Quote: Ἰουλίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Julius is the name of a man.

of the Augustan regiment

Quote: σπείρης Σεβαστῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The Augustan regiment was the name of the military unit from which this centurion came. Some versions translate this as the “Imperial regiment.”

Acts 27:2

from Adramyttium

Quote: Ἀδραμυντηνῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word ** Adramyttium ** is the name of a city.

a ship … being about to sail

Quote: πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it”

Aristarchus

Quote: Ἀριστάρχου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Aristarchus is the name of a man who came from Macedonia but who had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in 19:29.

Acts 27:3

we came down to Sidon

Quote: κατήχθημεν εἰς Σιδῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

As the General Notes to this chapter explain, Luke says that he and the other travelers came down to Sidon because that was the customary way in this culture of describing people arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Sidon”

to receive {their} care

Quote: ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of care, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could care for him”

Acts 27:4

we sailed under Cyprus

Quote: ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression sailed under does not mean that the travelers sailed south of the island of Cyprus, such as Luke describes in 21:3, even though that would have been the shortest route. Rather, sailed under means that the ship kept close to the northern shore of the island, which loomed above the ship and blocked the wind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we stayed close to the northern shore of Cyprus”

Acts 27:5

we came down to Myra of Lycia

Quote: κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the travelers got off the ship at Myra. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we came down to Myra of Lycia, where we got off the ship”

Myra of Lycia

Quote: Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Myra is the name of a city, and the word Lycia is the name of the province in which that city was located.

Acts 27:6

an Alexandrian ship sailing to Italy

Quote: πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was doing by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was sailing it to Italy”

Alexandrian

Quote: Ἀλεξανδρῖνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Alexandrian is the name for someone or something that comes from the city of Alexandria. See how you translated it in 18:24.

Acts 27:7

And sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus

Quote: ἐν ἱκαναῖς δὲ ἡμέραις, βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the ship was sailing slowly and with difficulty because it was sailing into the wind. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus because we were sailing into the wind”

Cnidus

Quote: τὴν Κνίδον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cnidus is the name of a city.

Crete … Salmone

Quote: τὴν Κρήτην & Σαλμώνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Crete is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in 2:11. The word Salmone is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete.

Acts 27:8

sailing along it

Quote: παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun it refers the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing along the island of Crete”

with difficulty

Quote: μόλις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that even under the shelter of the island of Crete, the winds were still so strong as to make sailing to the west difficult. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with difficulty because the winds from the west were strong even there”

Fair Havens

Quote: Καλοὺς Λιμένας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Fair Havens is the name of a port on the south coast of the island of Crete.

was … the city of Lasea

Quote: πόλις ἦν Λασαία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Lasea is the name of a city on the coast of the island of Crete.

Acts 27:9

even the fast had already passed

Quote: τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that after this fast, which came in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even the fast had already passed and so there was a higher risk of seasonal storms”

the fast

Quote: τὴν νηστείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is referring to the Day of Atonement by association with the way that Jews observed a fast in connection with that sacred day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Day of Atonement”

Paul was warning them

Quote: παρῄνει ὁ Παῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the centurion and to the pilot and owner of the ship, as verse 11 makes clear. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was warning Julius and the pilot and the owner of the ship”

Acts 27:10

I see

Quote: θεωρῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is speaking as if he could literally see the things he describes. He means that God has revealed them to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has revealed to me”

the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives

Quote: μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of injury and loss, you could express the same ideas in other ways. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “on this voyage, many of us will be injured and we will lose many valuable things. We will not only lose the cargo and the ship, we will lose our lives”

Acts 27:11

the centurion was being persuaded more by the pilot and by the captain than by the things being spoken by Paul

Quote: ὁ & ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying”

by the captain

Quote: τῷ ναυκλήρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the word captain could mean: (1) someone who was in command of the ship. Alternate translation: “the ship’s commander” (2) someone who owned the ship and was in command of it. However, while this is a common meaning of the word, it is unlikely in this context. We learn from the story that this ship was carrying grain from Egypt to Italy and so it would have belonged to the emperor’s own fleet. Alternate translation: “the shipowner”

Acts 27:12

harbor

Quote: λιμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A harbor is a place on the coast whose location and shape allow ships to come safely close to the land. If your language does not have a term for such a place, you could use a general description in your translation. Alternate translation: “place of access to the shore”

wintering, … to winter there

Quote: παραχειμασίαν & παραχειμάσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The terms wintering and to winter mean to stay in a place that is safe during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season”

Phoenix

Quote: Φοίνικα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Phoenix is the name of a port city on the south coast of Crete.

looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind

Quote: βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This expression means that the Phoenix harbor provided access for ships to sail out in the directions that the winds coming from the southwest and the northwest blew. That is, ships would sail out to the northeast and southeast from the harbor, and they would enter the harbor from the northeast or southeast. Your language and culture may have a comparable expression of its own that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could describe this in general terms. Alternate translation: “looking down the northwest wind and down the southwest wind”

looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind

Quote: βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the harbor of Phoenix was literally looking in these directions. He means that it gave access for ships to sail in those directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “giving access for sailing to the northeast or to the southeast”

the southwest wind … the northwest wind

Quote: λίβα & χῶρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The southwest is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the northwest is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions.

Acts 27:13

having raised {the anchor

Quote: ἄραντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

An anchor is a heavy object that is attached to a rope that is tied to a ship. The ship’s crew tosses the anchor into the water and it sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. The crew raises the anchor out of the water when it is time for the ship to travel. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. Alternate translation: “having weighed anchor”

they were sailing along

Quote: παρελέγοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the crew of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the crew was sailing the ship”

Acts 27:14

after not long

Quote: μετ’ οὐ πολὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “after a short time”

called Eurakylon

Quote: ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The term Euraklyon is a combination of the Greek word for the east wind and the Latin word for the north wind. Luke spells out the term using Greek letters so that his readers will know how it sounds. This seems to be the name that Luke heard the sailors give to this wind. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also say what it means. Alternate translation: “called the Northeaster”

called

Quote: ὁ καλούμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the sailors called”

it

Quote: αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun it refers to the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the island of Crete”

Acts 27:15

And the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind

Quote: συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the wind seized the ship, so that we were not able to face into the wind”

the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind

Quote: συναρπασθέντος & τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of the wind as if it were a living thing that seized the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming”

to face into the wind

Quote: ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the ship literally had a face that it could turn towards the wind. Your language may have an expression that suits this context and that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to bear up against the wind”

we were driven along

Quote: ἐφερόμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind drove us along”

Acts 27:16

running under a certain island called Cauda

Quote: νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression running under is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong”

a certain island called Cauda

Quote: νησίον & τι & καλούμενον Καῦδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda”

Cauda

Quote: Καῦδα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Cauda is the name of a small island located off the south coast of Crete.

of the lifeboat

Quote: τῆς σκάφης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A lifeboat is a smaller boat that crews sometimes tow behind their larger ship and sometimes bring up onto the ship and tie down. They use the smaller boat for various reasons, including escaping from the larger ship if it is sinking. If your language does not have a term for a smaller boat like this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the smaller utility boat that the ship was towing”

Acts 27:17

they were using helps, undergirding the ship

Quote: βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word helps is a nautical term that means ropes or cables. The word undergirding describes the process of running ropes or cables around the bottom of a ship so that the ship will not come apart during a storm. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were tying ropes around the bottom of the ship so that it would not come apart during the storm”

they were using

Quote: ἐχρῶντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here and in the next two verses, the pronoun they refers to the sailors of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were using”

lest they might fall into the Syrtis

Quote: μὴ εἰς τὴν Σύρτιν ἐκπέσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression fall into is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship becoming stuck in quicksand. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they might run aground on the Syrtis”

the Syrtis

Quote: τὴν Σύρτιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Syrtis is the name of a large mass of quicksand near the north coast of Africa.

the Syrtis

Quote: τὴν Σύρτιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Quicksand, which the word Syrtis describes, is sand that is saturated with water. It does not support the weight of a person, so sailors cannot get out of a ship to free it if the ship gets stuck in quicksand. If your readers would not be familiar with quicksand, you could describe it generally in your translation. Alternate translation: “the large mass of waterlogged sand off the north coast of Africa”

lowering the gear

Quote: χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term gear could mean: (1) the sails of the ship and the rigging that the sailors uses to raise and lower the sails. If this is the meaning, then Luke is saying that without sails, the sailors could not steer the ship and it had to go wherever the wind drove it. Alternate translation: “taking down the sails” (2) a sea anchor, that is, some object that the sailors would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow the ship down. If this is the meaning, then the sailors lowered this sea anchor in the hopes that the storm would end before they reached the quicksand. Alternate translation: “putting a sea anchor into the water”

they were being driven along

Quote: ἐφέροντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was driving them along”

Acts 27:18

we being exceedingly storm-tossed

Quote: σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly”

they were doing a jettison

Quote: ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word jettison is a nautical term that describes sailors throwing the cargo of a ship (the goods that the ship is transporting) into the sea to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent it from sinking. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were throwing the cargo of the ship into the sea to make the ship lighter to try to keep it from sinking”

Acts 27:19

on the third day

Quote: τῇ τρίτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” So here, the third day means two days after the sailors tied ropes around the ship and one day after the sailors threw the cargo overboard. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “on the day after that”

on the third day

Quote: τῇ τρίτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If you retain this idiom but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three”

they threw the equipment of the ship {overboard

Quote: τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sailors threw the equipment … overboard in a desperate effort to make the ship even lighter. In this context, equipment refers to everything the sailors needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates that they had given up on sailing the ship and were hoping just to survive. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they became so desperate that they threw overboard everything they needed to sail the ship, hoping just to survive”

with their own hands

Quote: αὐτόχειρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of the sailors, their hands, to represent all of them in the act of throwing the cargo overboard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “themselves”

Acts 27:20

neither sun nor stars appearing for many days

Quote: μήτε & ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sun and stars did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days”

no small storm

Quote: χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm”

lying upon us

Quote: ἐπικειμένου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of the storm as if they were a living thing that was lying upon the ship. He means that the storm continued to buffet the ship without ever letting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continually buffeting the ship”

all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away

Quote: λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the same ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we finally lost all hope that we could save ourselves”

all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away

Quote: λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we finally stopped hoping that we could save ourselves”

all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away

Quote: λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it finally became very difficult to hope that we could save ourselves”

Acts 27:21

as there had been much abstinence

Quote: πολλῆς & ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of abstinence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food”

having stood up in the midst of them

Quote: σταθεὶς & ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

Paul stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say”

this damage and loss

Quote: τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms injury and loss mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “such a great loss”

Acts 27:22

there will be no loss of life among you, only of the ship

Quote: ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship”

Acts 27:23

of the God whose I am and whom I serve

Quote: τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗ εἰμι, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The phrases whose I am and whom I serve mean similar things. Paul is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the God I worship”

Acts 27:24

saying, ‘Do not be afraid, Paul. It is necessary for you to stand before Caesar, and behold, God has graciously granted to you all the ones sailing with you

Quote: λέγων, μὴ φοβοῦ, Παῦλε; Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι, καὶ ἰδοὺ, κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ Θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The angel told me that I should not be afraid, because it was necessary for me to stand before Caesar, and behold, God had graciously granted to me all the ones sailing with me”

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The angel is using the term behold to focus Paul’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation.

It is necessary for you to stand before Caesar

Quote: Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The angel is using one aspect of the trial process, the fact that an accused person would stand before a judge, to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must appear in Caesar’s court so that he can judge you”

Acts 27:25

according to the way it was told to me

Quote: καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way the angel told me”

Acts 27:26

to fall upon some island

Quote: εἰς νῆσον & τινα & ἐκπεσεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression fall upon is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island”

Acts 27:27

the fourteenth night

Quote: τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “night 14”

as we were being driven about

Quote: διαφερομένων ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was driving us about”

the Hadria

Quote: τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Hadria is the term that people of this culture used to describe the open Mediterranean Sea between Italy and Malta on the west and Greece and Crete on the east.

some land to be approaching them

Quote: προσάγειν τινὰ αὐτοῖς χώραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Luke is speaking of this land as if it were a living thing that was approaching the sailors on the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were approaching some land”

Acts 27:28

taking soundings

Quote: βολίσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression taking soundings is a nautical term that describes sailors determining the depth of the water. Sailors measure this by dropping a marked line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water”

20 fathoms, … 15 fathoms

Quote: ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι & ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers

A fathom is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet”

Acts 27:29

we might fall upon

Quote: κατὰ & ἐκπέσωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression fall upon is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on some rugged place. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on”

the stern

Quote: πρύμνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word stern is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back of the ship”

Acts 27:30

the bow

Quote: πρῴρης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word bow is a nautical term that means the front of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the front of the ship”

Acts 27:31

you are not able to be saved

Quote: ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to save yourselves”

Acts 27:32

fall away

Quote: ἐκπεσεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression fall away is a nautical term that in this context could mean: (1) that the soldiers let the lifeboat fall into the water where none of the sailors could get into it, because it was no longer tied to the ship. Alternate translation: “fall into the water” (2) that the soldiers let the lifeboat, which was already in the water, drift away where none of the sailors could get into it. Alternate translation: “drift away”

Acts 27:33

Anxiously waiting for a fourteenth day today, you are continuing

Quote: τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες & διατελεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is now day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing”

fasting, having eaten nothing

Quote: ἄσιτοι & μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The expressions fasting and having eaten nothing mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all”

Acts 27:34

this is for your salvation

Quote: τοῦτο & πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive”

a hair from the head of none of you will perish

Quote: οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a hair from his head, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm”

Acts 27:36

they were all encouraged

Quote: εὔθυμοι & γενόμενοι πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

The phrase were … encouraged is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated encouraged is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all”

Acts 27:37

we, all the souls in the ship, were 276

Quote: ἤμεθα & αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

the souls

Quote: αἱ & ψυχαὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their souls, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people”

Acts 27:38

having been satisfied with food

Quote: κορεσθέντες & τροφῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them”

Acts 27:39

they were not recognizing

Quote: οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here and in the rest of this verse and in the next verse, the pronoun they refers to the sailors. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were not recognizing”

a certain bay

Quote: κόλπον & τινα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A bay is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this kind of area. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land”

Acts 27:40

the bands of the rudders

Quote: τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The words bands and rudders are nautical terms. The rudders were large pieces of wood at the back of the ship that the sailors used for steering the ship. The bands were ropes or cords that held the rudders out of the water while anchors were holding the ship in one place. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the ropes that held out of the water the pieces of wood that the sailors used to steer the ship”

the topsail

Quote: τὸν ἀρτέμωνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A sail is a large piece of cloth that catches the wind in order to propel a ship through the water. A topsail is a sail that sailors place at the top of a mast on a ship. A mast is a vertical pole with cross-poles that hold sails. Alternate translation: “the sail that sailors put at the top of a pole, high above the ship”

they were heading to the beach

Quote: κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context, the expression they were heading is a nautical term that describes a ship moving in a specific direction. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were steering the ship toward the beach”

Acts 27:41

having fallen into

Quote: περιπεσόντες & εἰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression having fallen into is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking”

a place between two seas

Quote: τόπον διθάλασσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression a place between two seas is a nautical term that describes a sandbar that extends out from the land. A sandbar forms when a sea current coming from one direction flows across a sea current coming from another direction. This causes the sand under the water to pile up, making the water shallow and dangerous for ships. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “a sandbar extending out from the land”

but the stern was being loosed by the violence

Quote: ἡ δὲ πρύμνα ἐλύετο ὑπὸ τῆς βίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the violence was breaking up the stern”

by the violence

Quote: ὑπὸ τῆς βίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is referring to the violence of the waves that were hitting the stern of the ship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by the violence of the waves”

by the violence

Quote: ὑπὸ τῆς βίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of violence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the waves that were hitting it were so strong”

Acts 27:44

and the rest

Quote: καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the rest to depart”

Acts 28

Acts 28 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Letters” and “brothers”

The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.

When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“He was a god”

The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.

Acts 28:1

having been brought safely through

Quote: διασωθέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it seems that Luke means to say that it was God. Alternate translation: “after God had brought us safely through”

the island was called Malta

Quote: Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the island Malta”

Malta

Quote: Μελίτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Malta is the name of an island located south of the island of Sicily.

Acts 28:2

the barbarians

Quote: οἵ & βάρβαροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke is using the word barbarians in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives”

no ordinary benevolence

Quote: οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary benevolence”

Acts 28:3

a viper

Quote: ἔχιδνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A viper is a dangerous poisonous snake. If your readers would not recognize this name, you could use the name of another poisonous snake they might recognize or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a snake whose venom was poisonous”

Acts 28:4

Justice

Quote: ἡ δίκη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Justice is the name of a false god who the people of this time believed would avenge crimes.

Acts 28:6

him to begin to be inflamed or suddenly to fall down dead

Quote: αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι, ἢ καταπίπτειν ἄφνω νεκρόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the effects of the venom would begin to inflame him or that he would suddenly fall down dead” or “that the effects of the venom would make his body start to swell or that he would suddenly fall down dead”

nothing unusual happening to him

Quote: μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle nothing and the negative adjective unusual. Alternate translation: “everything happening to him as usual”

turning themselves around

Quote: μεταβαλόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is speaking as if the natives of Malta were literally turning themselves around. He means that they came to a different opinion about who Paul was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression from your own language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “changing their minds”

they said he was a god

Quote: ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘He is a god!’”

Acts 28:7

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Luke is using the word Now to introduce background information about Publius that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.

of the first

Quote: τῷ πρώτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular kind of person. In this context, first has the sense of most prominent. Since Publius is a Roman name, this man was probably the Roman governor of the island. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of the most prominent man” or “of the Roman governor”

Publius

Quote: Ποπλίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Publius is the name of a man.

Acts 28:8

being afflicted with fevers and dysentery

Quote: πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom fevers and dysentery were afflicting”

dysentery

Quote: δυσεντερίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word dysentery describes an infectious intestinal disease. In your translation, you could use a term a similar disease, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “intestinal disease”

Acts 28:9

being healed

Quote: ἐθεραπεύοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was healing them”

Acts 28:10

honored us with many honors

Quote: πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Luke assumes that his readers will understand that these honors probably included gifts. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “gave us many gifts”

Acts 28:11

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Dioscouri is the name of two false gods, Castor and Pollux, whom some sailors considered to be their patron gods. The name means “Sons of Zeus” in Greek. Alternate translation: “with Castor and Pollux as their figurehead”

[GL Quote Not Found!]

Quote: παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A figurehead was an image of a god, human being, animal, or object that was painted or sculpted on the prow (front) of a ship as a good luck token. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “with images of Castor and Pollux sculpted on the prow”

Acts 28:12

having come down to Syracuse

Quote: καταχθέντες εἰς Συρακούσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that he and the others traveling with him had come down to Syracuse because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed at Syracuse”

Syracuse

Quote: Συρακούσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Syracuse is the name of a city on the southeast coast of the island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy.

Acts 28:13

we came down to Rhegium

Quote: κατηντήσαμεν εἰς Ῥήγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Luke says that he and those traveling with him came down to Rhegium because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Rhegium”

Rhegium

Quote: Ῥήγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Rhegium is the name of a port city that was located at the southwestern tip of Italy.

Puteoli

Quote: Ποτιόλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Puteoli is the name of a city that was located on the west coast of Italy.

Acts 28:14

brothers

Quote: ἀδελφοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers”

we were begged

Quote: παρεκλήθημεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they begged us”

thus we went towards Rome

Quote: οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

Since Luke describes in the next verse how believers from Rome came some distance to meet Paul and his companions on their way to Rome, by thus he means that after staying with the believers in Puetoli for seven days, they continued on their way to Rome. In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “we came near Rome”

Acts 28:15

From there

Quote: κἀκεῖθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By there, Luke implicitly means Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “From Rome”

the brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers”

having heard the things about us

Quote: ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that these believers had heard from the believers in Puteoli while Paul and his companions were staying with them that they were on their way to Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having learned from the believers in Puteoli that we were coming”

took courage

Quote: ἔλαβε θάρσος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “became encouraged”

the Forum of Appius … Three Taverns

Quote: Ἀππίου Φόρου & Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The phrase the Forum of Appius is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase Three Taverns is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome.

Acts 28:16

Paul was allowed

Quote: ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman officials allowed Paul”

by himself

Quote: καθ’ ἑαυτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since there was a soldier with Paul who was guarding him, Luke does not mean that Paul stayed all by himself. Rather, he means that the Roman authorities allowed Paul to live in a rented house (as verse 30 indicates) rather than putting him in prison. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in a rented house”

Acts 28:17

And it happened that

Quote: ἐγένετο δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.

first among the Jews

Quote: τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, first has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “most prominent among the Jews”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers”

Men, brothers

Quote: ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews”

to the fathers’ customs

Quote: τοῖς ἔθεσι τοῖς πατρῴοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers’ to describe customs that have been passed down among the Jews through the generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ancestral customs”

to the people

Quote: τῷ λαῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By the people, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people”

I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem

Quote: ἐγώ & δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner”

the hands

Quote: τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hands represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody”

Acts 28:18

there was no reason in me for death

Quote: τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring to a penalty of death by association with death itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to deserve the death penalty”

Acts 28:19

the Jews

Quote: τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem”

I was forced

Quote: ἠναγκάσθην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my concern for my safety forced me”

my nation

Quote: τοῦ ἔθνους μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring by association to the people of the Jewish nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people”

Acts 28:20

the hope of Israel

Quote: τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Israel is hoping for”

on account of the hope of Israel

Quote: εἵνεκεν & τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had hope for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again”

of Israel

Quote: τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Paul is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel”

I am bound with this chain

Quote: τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this chain is binding me”

I am bound with this chain

Quote: τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the chain with which he is bound, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Romans are keeping me as a prisoner”

Acts 28:21

We

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By We, these Jewish leaders mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

of the brothers

Quote: τῶν ἀδελφῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

These Jewish leaders are using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our fellow Jews”

nor have any of the brothers, coming, reported or said anything

Quote: οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἀπήγγειλεν ἢ ἐλάλησέν τι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms reported and said mean similar things. The Jewish leaders are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “nor have any of the brothers, coming, told us anything at all”

Acts 28:22

it is known to us

Quote: γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we know”

it is spoken against

Quote: ἀντιλέγεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people speak against it”

everywhere

Quote: πανταχοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The Jewish leaders say everywhere here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in places throughout the empire”

Acts 28:23

more

Quote: πλείονες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Luke is using the adjective more as a noun to mean the larger number of people who came to hear Paul speak. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “more people”

testifying about the kingdom of God

Quote: διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “testifying about how God had begun to rule as king”

both from the Law of Moses and the Prophets

Quote: ἀπό τε τοῦ νόμου Μωϋσέως, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Luke is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming two of their major parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from passages throughout the Scriptures”

Acts 28:24

some were convinced by the things being said

Quote: οἱ & ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some”

Acts 28:25

having spoken one word

Quote: εἰπόντος & ῥῆμα ἓν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Luke is using the term word to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement”

your fathers

Quote: τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors”

Acts 28:26

saying, ‘Go to this people and say, By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all

Quote: λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation inside the first one. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to go to the people of Israel and tell them that by hearing they would hear but they would not understand at all and that seeing they would see but they would not perceive at all”

saying, ‘Go

Quote: λέγων, πορεύθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does.

say, By hearing

Quote: εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a third-level quotation.

By hearing you will hear … seeing you will see

Quote: ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε & βλέποντες βλέψετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see”

By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all

Quote: ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You will become aware of what is happening around you but you will not understand the significance of what is happening”

but you will not understand at all, … but you will not perceive at all

Quote: καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan.

you will not perceive at all

Quote: οὐ μὴ ἴδητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with a closing third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a third-level quotation.

Acts 28:27

For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with {their} ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes, lest they might see with {their} eyes, and they might hear with {their} ears, and they might understand with {their} heart and turn back, and I would heal them

Quote: ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν, καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to say that because the heart of that people had been thickened, and with their ears they had hardly heard, and they had shut their eyes. Otherwise they might have seen with their eyes, and they might have heard with their ears, and they might have understood with their heart and turned back, and God would have healed them”

For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with {their} ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes

Quote: ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These three phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “For this people is stubbornly refusing to use its senses”

the heart of this people has been thickened

Quote: ἐπαχύνθη & ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Isaiah is speaking as if the heart of the people of Israel has literally been thickened. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn”

the heart

Quote: ἡ καρδία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Isaiah is speaking as if the heart of the people of Israel has literally been thickened. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn”

the heart of this people

Quote: ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts of these people”

the heart … with {their} heart

Quote: ἡ καρδία & τῇ καρδίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the heart represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking”

has been thickened

Quote: ἐπαχύνθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has become thick”

and with {their} ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes

Quote: καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Isaiah is speaking as if the people of Israel have become unable to hear and have shut their eyes so that they will not see. He means that they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them”

with {their} ears they have hardly heard, … they might see with {their} eyes, … they might hear with {their} ears

Quote: τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν & ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς & τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly”

they might see with {their} eyes, and they might hear with {their} ears

Quote: ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they might use their senses”

turn back

Quote: ἐπιστρέψωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Isaiah is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again”

I would heal them

Quote: ἰάσομαι αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

This does not mean God would only heal the people physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. Alternate translation: “I would heal them and forgive them”

I would heal them

Quote: ἰάσομαι αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks

This is the end of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with closing second-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a second-level quotation.

Acts 28:28

let it be known

Quote: γνωστὸν & ἔστω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you”

this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles

Quote: τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who has done the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent me to proclaim this salvation of his to the Gentiles”

this salvation of God

Quote: τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this message about how God saves people”

they will hear

Quote: αὐτοὶ & ἀκούσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In this context the word hear likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it”

Acts 28:29

Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote.

Acts 28:30

And he stayed for two whole years in his own rented house

Quote: ἐνέμεινεν δὲ διετίαν ὅλην ἐν ἰδίῳ μισθώματι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

This is the beginning of information that Luke presents to bring the story of the book of Acts to a close. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.

he stayed

Quote: ἐνέμεινεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul stayed”

Acts 28:31

the kingdom of God

Quote: τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God had begun to rule as king”

with all boldness, without hindrance

Quote: μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας ἀκωλύτως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of boldness and hindrance, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “very boldly, with no one hindering him”

with all boldness

Quote: μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis.